Sie sind auf Seite 1von 244

Ethiopian Building Code Standard

UTIUZATION OF TIMBER

Ministry of Works & Urban Development


Addis Ababa, Ethiopia

1995
;>"

,..

I....

.,"

~661

1f!dofIP:I "uquqy s!ppv


:JDamdol~ueCPO" qiOk\.Jo ~

--------------

----

EBCS-S
ETHIOPIAN BUILDINC CODe STANDARD
FOR UTILIZATION OF TIMBER

Project Council Members

Technical Committee Me.ben

Abashawl Woldemariam (Chairman)


Almayehu Gizawt
Bekele Mekonnen
Negussie Tebedge
Seifu Birke
Wouhib Kebede

Mikyas Abayneh (Secretary)


Belayneh Adafre
Degafi Sisay

t Deceased

FOREWORD

The Proclamation to define the powers and duties of the Central and Regional Executive
Organs of the Transitional Government of Ethiopia No. 41/1993 empowers the Ministry of Works
and Urban Development to prepare the Country's Building Code, issue Standards for design and
construction works, and follow up and supervise the implementation of same.
In exercise of these powers and in discharge of its responsibility, the Ministry is issuing a

series of Building Code Standards of general application.


The purpose of these standard'S is to serve 'as nationally recognized documents, the
application of which is deemed to ensure compliance of buildings with the minimum requirements
for design,construction and quality of materials set down by the National Building Code,

the major benefits to be gained in applying these standards are the harmonization of
professional practice and the ensuring ofappropriete levels of safety, health and economy with due
consideration of the objective conditions and needs of the country.
As these standards are technical documents which, by their very nature, require periodic
updating, revised editions will be issued by the Ministry from time to time as appropriate..
The Ministry welcomes comments and suggestions on all aspect of the Ethiopian Building
Code Standards. All feedback received will be carefully reviewed by professional experts.in the
field of building construction with a view to possible incorporation of amendments. in future
editions.

Haile Assegidie
Minister
Ministry of Works and
Urban Development
1995

.: ,
j .:

. iUfo

,f./
.',f,

PREFACE

Tills first issue of Ethiopian Building Code Standard on the Utilization of Timber has
heen prepared by a Committee under the direction of the Ministry of Works and Urban
Development.

In its effort to cover the basic essentials in the Utilization of Timber, the Committee
relied heavily on experience gained elsewhere, made detailed studies of available
documents on the subject and referred closely to other national and international
standards. The Committee hopes that both manufacturers and users of timber will benefit
from this Code Standard. The Committee is also confident that the Code Standard will
be enriched further when reviewed in the future and be kept abreast of progress.

..

-.~---

----

EBCS - 5 1995
UTILIZATION OF TIMBER

CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 MILLED PRODUCTS & SAWN BOARDS

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4

SCOPE
TIMBER SPEoIES
DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION
MEASUREMENT OF IMPERFECTIONS

1
1
3
3

1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7

3
3
4
4
4
4
4

1.5

Knots and Holes


Bow and Spring
Twist
Wane and Want
Sloping Grain and Spiral Grain
Plugging of Holes and Unsound Knots
General Quality

GRADE DESCRIPTIONS
1.5.1
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.5.5

4
5
6
7

Clear Grade
Clear Face Grade
Standard Grade
Utility Grade

CHAPTER 2 WOOD TESTING METHODS


2.1

MOISTURE CONTENT OF TIMBER

2.1.1 Scope and Application


9
2.1.2 Determination of Moisture Content by Oven-drying Method
9
2.1.3 Determination of Moisture Content by Electrical Moisture Meter Methods 11
2.2

DETERMINATION OF DENSITY FOR PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL TESTS


13
13
2.2.1 Scope and Field of Application
2.2.2 Principle
13

CONTENTS

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

2.3

2.2.3 Apparatus
2.2.4 Preparation of Test Pieces
2.2.5 Procedure

13

14

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES:-

15

2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.4

13

Modulus of Elasticity in Bending


Shear modulus
Shear Parallel to Grain
Cleavage Test
Hardness or Janka (Indentation) Test
Determination of Ultimate Stress in Compression Parallel to Grain

15

17

19

19

19

20

SPECIFICAnON FOR SIZES OF SAWN HARD WOODS AND SOFT WOODS

METHODS OF MEASUREMENTS
21

2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4

Scope
Basic Sizes-of Sawn Hardwoods
Methods of measurement
Sizes and Maximum Permitted Deviations

21

22

23

24

CHAPTER 3 STRESS GRADING, VISUAL AND MECHANICAL GRADING

OF HARDWOODS AND SOFTWOODS


3.1

VISUALLY STRESS-GRADED HARD WOOD FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES27


3. 1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3. 1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
3. 1.8

3.2

27

Scope and General


Timber Species and their Strength Groups and Stress Grade Ratings
Grades
Definitions and Interpretation
Sizes and Tolerances
Measurements of Imperfections
Imperfections Occurring Close to an Arris
Grade Limitations and Grading

27

27

28

28

29

29

31

31

IDENTIFICATION

32

3.2.1 Branding
3.2.2 Colour marking

32

32

00

II

EBCS - 5 1995

CONTENTS

-~~~~~-'----~--------

-~---~~.----------~---_

..

----._-~--_._-----

- ..._ - - -

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

3.3

3.4

GRADE DESCRIPTIONS

32

3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7

32

34

36

38

39

40

40

Structural Grade No.1


Structural Grade No.2
Structural Grade No.3
Structural Grade No.4
Stud Grades
Lintel Grades
Appearance Grades

MECHANICAL STRESS GRADING OF TIMBER

41

3.4.1 Specification for mechanical stress Grading of Timber.


3.4.2 Rules for Mechanical Stress Grading of Timber

41

44

CHAPTEl\ 4 WOOD FRAMES

51

SCOPE AND GENERAL

51

4.1.1 Scope
4.1.2 Application
4.1.3 Terms and Definitions

51

51

52

4.2

STRESS GRADES

53

4.3

SIZES

53

4.3.1 Alternative Timber Sizes


4.3.2 Sizes in Tables

53

53

4.4

SPANS

54

4.5

STORAGE AND HANDLING OF TIMBERS

54

4.6

SUB STRUCTURE

57

4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3

57

5f'
58

4.1

CONTENTS

Site Preparation
Ventilation of Subfloor Spaces
Termite Protection

EBCS - 5 7995

iii

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

Foundations
Footings
Timber Stumps and Posts
Timbers in Contact with Ground
Timber Soleplates or Footings
Sizes of Footings and Soleplates
Lateral Stability

61

61

CHAPTER 5 TIMBER FLOOR FRAMING AND FLOORING

67

5.1

APPLICATION OF SECTION

67

5.2

PROTECTION AND DURABILITY OF FLOOR TIMBERS

67

5.3

DRILLING AND NOTCHING OF MEMBERS

68

5.4

FLOOR FRAMING SUPPORTED BY MASONRY OR CONCRETE. WALLING 69

5.5

FLOOR BEARERS

70

5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4

70

4.6.4
4.6.5
4,6.6
4.6.7
4.6:8
4.6.9
4.6.10

5.6

General Requirements.
Location of Bearers
Floor Joists
Opening in Floors

58

59

59

60

60

71

72

74

FLOORING

75

5.6.1 General
5.6.2 Types of flooring

75

75

CHAPTER 6 TIMBER WALL FRAMING

77

6.1

GENERAL

77

6.1.1 Requirements
6.1.2 Definitions of Effective Rooflengtlulsl.)
6.1.3 Effect of Eaves Overhang

77

iv

EBCS - 51995

77

77

CONTENTS

-----------

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

6.2

STUDS AND STRAIGHTENING OF STUDS

77

6.2.1 Housing, Notching, or Drilling

78

6.3

EAVES, BEAMS AND VERANDAH PLATES

80

6.4

NOGGINGS

81

6.5

BRACING OF STUD WALLS

~1

6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.5.4

81

Temporary Bracing
Permanent Bracing
Structural Plywood Bracing
Non-Load Bearing Internal Walls

82

83

84

CHAPTER 7 TIMBER ROOF }'RAMING

87

7.1

APPLICAnON OF SECTION

87

7.2

CEILING JOISTS

87

.:' ;

7.2.1
'7:2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.5
7.2.6

87

General
Spacing and-direction
Splicing
Support
Opening in Ceilings
Ceiling battens

88

88

88

88

89

7.3

HANGING BEAMS

89

7.4

RIDGE BOARDS

90

7.4.1 Unstrutted Ridge Boards


7.4.2 Strutted Ridge Boards
7.4.3 Splicing of Ridge Boards

90

90

90

UNDER PURLINS

91

7.5

CONTENTS

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

7.6

7.7

7.8

7.9

COMMON RAFfERS

91

7.6.1 Span
7.6.2 Lateral Restraint
7.6.3 Roofing Material Groups

91

91

92

ROOF STRUTTING

92

7.7.1 General
7.7.2 Roof Struts
7.7.3 Strutting Beams

92

93

94

COLLAR TIES

97

7.8.1 Fitting
7.8.2 Sizes

97

97

WIND BRACING

9X

CHAPTER 8 TIMBER DOORS, WINDOWS INCLUDING FRAMES AND LININGS99


8.1

8.2

MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

99

8.1.1 Timber Sizes and Weights

99

DESIGN

99

8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.2.7
8.2.8
8.2.9
8.2.10

vi

Function
Weather Protection
Durability
Economy
Doors: Methods of Opening
Types of Doors
Doors: Strength, Rigidity and Dimensional Stability
Doors/ Panels
Frames and Linings
Sizes of Door Sets, Door Leaves and Frames

EBCS - 51995

99

100

101

102

102

105

le7
111

112

114

CONTENTS

--~- ~---~----

-~-_.

UTILIZA T/()N OF TIMBER

8.3

SPECIFICATION FOR TIMBER WINDOWS

116

8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.3.5
8.3.6
8.3.7
8.3.8
8.3.9
8.3.10
8.3.11
8.3.12
8.3.13

116

116

118

118

118

118

119

120

121

121

122

122

123

Scope
Classification
Materials
Weather Stripping
Hard ware, Bearing devices and Fittings.
Fastenings
Joints
Moving Parts
Protective Coatings
Surface Coatings
Security
Safety
Protection

CHAPTER 9- PLYWOOD CONSTRUCTION, STRUCTURAL TIMBERS&

GLUE-LAMINATED MEMBERS

125

9.1

SCOPE

125

9.2

DEFINITIONS

125

9.3

MATERIALS

126

9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4

126

126

126

127

9.4

9.5

Timber
Maximum Thickness of Laminations
Variation in Thickness of Laminations
Moisture Content

ADHESIVES

127

9.4.1 General
9.4.2 Adhesives

127

127

MANUFACTURING REQUIREMENTS

128

9.5.1 Laminations

128

CONTENTS

EBCS - 5 1995

vii

-----------"

-~----

---------

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING;'CODE STANDARD _

9.6

9.7

9.8

9.9

9.10

9.11

END JOINTS IN LAMINATIONS

129

9.6.1
9.6.2
9.6.3
9.6.4
9.6.5
9.6.6

129

129

130

130

130

130

General
Scarf Joints
Finger Joints
Butt Joints
Staggering of Butt Joints or other Non-structural End Joints
Edge-joints

GLUING

130

9.1.1 Spreading
9.7.2 Control of Temperature
9.7.3 Cramping Pressure

130

130

131

CONTROL OF PRODUCTION

131

9.8.1 General
9.8.2 Site Gluing

131

132

INSPECTION AND TESTING

132

9.9.1
9.9.2
9.9.3
9.9.4

132

132

133

133

Inspection
Block Shear Test
Cleavage Test
Wet Cleavage Test

CLASSIFICATION OF PLY WOOD DURABILITY

133

9.10.1

133

CRITERIA FOR CLASSIFICATION OF PLYWOOD DURABILITY

viii

134

General
Natural durability of untreated timber
Preservative Treatment

134

134

134

END USE OF PLYWOOD OR LAMINATED TIMBER

136

9.11.1
9.11.2
9.11.3
9.12

Compliance

EBCS - 5 1995

CONTENTS

UTIUZA TION OF TIMBER

CHAPTER 10 WOOD FLOORING BLOCKS

137

10.1

INTRODUCTION

137

10.2

SCOPE

137

10.3

DEFINITIONS

138

10.4

~TER1AJLS

142

10.4.1
10.4.2
10.4.3
10.4.4
10.4.5
10.4.6
10.5

143

General
Wetting and Humidity
Resistance to Abrasions
Sound Insulation
'Thermal Insulation
Colour Sensitivity

143

14,3

144

144

144

144

SELECTION
10.6.1
10.6.2

10.7

142

142

142

142

143

143

PERFORMANCE FACTORS

10.5.1
10.5.2
10.5.3
10.5.4
10.5.5'
10.5.6

10.6

Classification of Timber
Basic Recommendations
Blocks
Mosaic Fingers
Parquet Strips
Nails

145

General
Selection of Timber Species

145

145

WOOD MOSAIC PARQUET FLOORING

149

10.7.1
10.7.2
10.7.3

149

149

151

CONTENTS

Scope
Grade Descriptions
Marking

EBCS - 5 1995

ix

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

10.8

THE INSTALLATION OF WOOD MOSAIC PARQUET FLOORING

151

10.8.1
10.8.2
10.8.3
10.8.4
10.8.5
10.8.6
10.8.7
10.8.8

151
151
152.
152
153
154
154
155

Scope
Definitions
Time of Installation
Materials
Wooden Sub Floors
Structural Sheet Subfloors
Subfloor Preparation
Bond Surface for Mosaic Parquet
. :'1 nC'i'i~jitic~E'"

10.9

INSTALLING MOSAIC PARQUET


10.9.1
10.9.2
10.9.3
10.9.4 .
10.9.5

Bonding
Compatibility of Adhesive
Adhesive
Respread of Adhesive
Expansion Gaps

; l.sL!f rrJ'fflo:)~H

156
156
156
156
156
156

,-r".

10.10 INSPECTION CONDITIONS

" :

~".

<

10.10.1
10.10.2
10.10.3
10.10.4
10.10.5
10.10.6
10.10.7
10.10.8

Inspection Rules
Batch
Sample
Nature of Inspections
Moisture
Dimensions
Defects and Appearance
Acceptance and Rejection

157

l.<

157
157
157
157
157
157
158
158

CHAPTER 11 SCAFFOLD PLANKS


:PART - I SOLID TIMBER SCAFFOLD PLANKS

159
'159

11.1

SCOPE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

159

11.1.1
11.1.2
11.1.3
11.1.4

159
159
159
159

'1l~1

Scope
Applicatiort
Strength Requirement
Definitions

i8t~ :i:.i5 - 1995'

C1J'lfIfENrs'

\---

---_.

I
i

--UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

11.1.5
11.1.6
11.1.7
11.1.8
11.1.9
11.2

160
160

1.60
160
161

VISUALLY GRADED SOFTWOOD SCAFFOLD PLANKS


11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.3
11.2.4

11.3

Combinations of Imperfections
Timber Species
Dimensions and Tolerances
Finish
Branding

Scope of Section
Moisture Content
Dimensions
Grade Description

161
161
161
161

VISUALLY GRADED HARDWOOD SCAFFOLD PLANKS


11.3.1
11.3.2
11.3.3
11.3.4

11.5

162

Scope of Section
Moisture Content
Dimensions
Grade Description

162
162
163
163
:...~.'

11.4

161

".

;' .'

MECHANICALLY STRESS GRADED SCAFFOLD PLANKS

164

11.4.1 Scope of Section


11.4.2 .Moisture Content
11.4.3 Stiffness Requirement
11.4.4 Dimensions
11.4.5 Grading of Ends
11.4.6 Visual Inspection

164
164
165
165
165

PROOF TESTING

165

11.5.1
11.5.2
11.5.3

1.64

165
165
166

Scope of Section
Criteria of Acceptance
Prooftests

PART 11- LAMINATED TIMBER SCAFFOLD PLANKS

167

11.6

167

SCOPE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

CONTENTS

- 5 ,1995
...EBCS
" .
:"::
"', . .
"

.~,'

xi

---------'-

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

11.6.1
11.6.2
11.6.3
11.6.4.
11.6.5
11.7

Scope
Timber Species
Definitions
Moisture Content
Dimensio-s and Tolerances

167
167
167
168
168

168

MANUFACTURE
11.7.1
11.7.2
11.7.3
11.7.4
11.7.5

Grading of Laminae
Manufacture
Adhesives and Adhesive Spread
Assembly
Quality Control

168
169
171
171
172

CHAPTER 12 TIMBER FASTENER & CONNECTORS

173

12.1

MECHANICAL FASTENERS FOR STRUCTURAL TIMBER WORK

173

12.1.1
12.1.2
12.1.3

173
173
175

Scope

l>efilUtioDS
Nails

12.2

STAPLES

178

1.2.3

WOOD SCREWS

179

12.4

WOODEN BOLTS

180

12.4.1
12.4.2
12.4.3
12.4.4
12.4.5
~

Timber Connectors Used with Bolts


Split-ring Connectors
Shear-plate Connectors
Timber Connectors of Sheet Metal
Fastening for Wide Members

182
182
183
184
185

APPENDIX A CHARACTERISTICS AND MACHINING PROPERTIES OF


SOME OF THE WELL KNOWN AND COMMONLY UTILIZED
ETHIOPIAN TIMBERS

xii

EBCS - 5 1995

CONTENTS

~~~-~~----

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

APPENDIX B PLUGGING KNOT AND CONE HOLES


APPENDIX C TABLES OF STRENGTH GROUPS AND PROPERTIES OF
STRUCTURAL TIMBERS.
APPENDIX D ILLUSTRATIONS OF IMPERFECTIONS
APPENDIX E DETERMINATION OF APPARENT
ELASTICITY AS A PLANK

MODULUS

OF

APPENDIX F SELECTION OF VERIFICATION STICKS


APPENDIX G METRIC STRESS GRADE DESIGNATIONS AND BASIC
WORKING STRESS IN BENDING
APPENDIX H STORAGE AND HANDLING OF TIMBER
APPENDIX I

SITE PREPARATION

APPENDIX J

LYCTID SUSCEPTIBILITY, DURABILITY IN GROUND


CONTACT, SHRINKAGE AND DENSITY OF SOME COMMON
STRUCTURAL TIMBERS

APPENDIX K PRECAUTIONS AGAINST WIND EFFECTS ON TIMBER-FRAMED


STRUCTURES
APPENDIX L TIMBER SPECIES

CONTENTS

EBCS - 5 1995

xiii

CHAPTER

MILLED PRODUCTS & SAWN BOARDS

1.1

SC:()J~

(1)
This specification applies primarily to seasoned sawn boards from Ethiopian indigenous
and exotic species, The grades are intended for use where appearance is of prime importance.
The boards may be full length or finger-jointed by agreement between the purchaser and the
manufacturer.

1.2

TIMB~R SJ~CIES

(1)

This specification applies to all Ethiopian grown and adopted species.'

Table 1.1 Mi\ior Species Available in the Market in the form of Sawn boards.
Ser,
No.
1
2

4
5

6
7
8

Botanical Name
i\lbizia <Jr3Jldibracteata
Albizin Gummfera
Albizia Schimperiana
Allophyllus Abyssinica
Aningeria Adolfi Friedericii
Apodytes dimidiata
Blighia Unijugata
bosquiea Ph Oberous

C:ommon Local name


Sessa
Sissa
Sissa (female
Keraro
Chelleleka
Tengi
Gebo

,'1

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

UTlUZA TlON OF TIMBER

Table 1.1 cont'd

sere

Botanical Name

Common Local Name

No.

9
10
11

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

Celtis Africana
Chlorophora Excellsa
Cordia Africana
Croton Macrosta Chyus
Cupress Lustanica
Diospyros Abyssinica
Ekebergia Rupplinia
Eucalyptus Globulus
Eucalyptus Grandis
Eucalyptus Soligna
Fagaropsis Angolensis
Hagenia Abyssinica
Juniperus Procera
Manilkara Butugi
Mimusops Kummel
Morous Musyzagia (species)
Ocotea Kenyensis
Olea Welwitschi
Olea Hochestiteria
Pinus Patula

Wanza
Bessana
Yeferenege Thid
Loko
Sombo
Nech Beherzaf
Grandis
Saligna (Key Baherzaf)
Dero
Koso
Thid Butugi
Kolati
Gonji
Soecho
Gegema
Damot W~ira
Patula
Patula

Polyscias Ferruginea
Pygeum Africanium

Radiala
Zigba
Zingero Wenber
Tikurinchet

Schefflera Abyssinica
Syzygium Guineense
War Burgia Ugandensis

Dokema
Kenfa(Beffty)

Pinus Radiata
Prodocarpus Gracillior

Aero Carpus

Note:

Amalaka
Dego (Iroko)

For further details on characteristics of timber species refer to Appendix A.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

. \

CHAPTER 1: MILLED PRODUC,TS & SA WN BOARDS

1.3

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

Face

That surface Up0J} which the quality of the board is determined when
grading is based on face appearance.

width and thickness

The width and thickness of the sawn board at the time of grading.

tolerance

At the time of grading the width and thickness of:boards shall not
differ from the ordered dimensions by more than 6mm,

moisture content (m.c)

at the time of delivery seasoned board the moisture content shall be


10' -15 % unless other wise agreed between purchaser and
manufacturer.
the moisture content must be determined by the oven-dry method.

Notes: (a}

(b)

1.4

Attention is also drawn to the need to consider any circumstances that may require
boards to be seasoned to a particular m.c either within or outside the range
specified above e.g. in areas of high or low equilibrium moisture content.
Information on the equilibrium m.c. applicable to timber species under
particular use conditions must be available.

MEASUREMENT OF IMPERFECTIONS

1.4.1 Knots and Holes

Knots and holes shall be measured as the width on the face measured between lines
parallel to the edges of board.
(1)

1.4.2 Bow and Spring


(1)
Bow and spring shall be measured
by stretching
a string from the edge at one end
of the
.
.
.
board to the same edge at the other end and measuring the maximum distance between the string
and the board.
~

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

-_._-~-_.

__

._--~.

__ ._-_.- --

- - - - - - - - - - - '..

_--------_.

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

1.4.3 Twist
(1)
Twist shall be measured by placing the board so that three of its corners are in contact
with a flat surface. The perpendicular distance between the fourth corner and the flat surface
shall be the measure of the twist.

1.4.4 Wane and Want

(1)
Wane and want shall be measured as the amount by which the width of the face or edge,
of a board is deficient.
1.4.5 Sloping Grain and Spiral Grain
(1)
Slope of grain and spiral grain, shall be measured over a distance sufficient to determine
the general slope, but not less than three times the width of the board. Local variations in slope
of grain around knots shall be disregarded.

1.4.6 Plugging of Holes and Unsound Knots


(1)
Holes and unsound knots of size permitted for knot and plugged in accordance with
Appendix B shall be regarded as sound knots..

1.4.7 General Quality


(1)
Imperfections that can be removed by normal machining shall be permitted. Sapwood
on any face or edge shall not be the cause for rejection.

1.5

. GRADE DESCRIPTIONS

1.5.1 ClearGrade

(1)
Each clear grade sawn board shall be gradedon both faces and both edges. It shall be
free from decay, sawn apparently straight and square, within the tolerances specified.
(2)

The boards shall be full length and free from defects on both faces and both edges.

EBCS 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

~-----~-~---~-----

CHAPTER 1: MILLED PRODUCTS & SA WN BOARDS

1.5.1.1

Imperfections
. (a) .Bow- evenly distributed and
for board thickness upto 25mm not exceeding the equivalent of 50mm
in 3m length.
(ii) for board thickness over 25mm and upto 40mm not exceeding the
equivalent of 20mm in 3m length.
.(iii) for board thickness over 40mm not exceedirig the equivalent of lmm in
3m length.
(i)

(b)

Spring- evenly distributed and


;

(i)'
(ii)

for board width upto l00mm not exceeding the equivalent of 30mm in
3m length.
'", .
for board width over lOOmm and upto 160mm not exceeding the
equivalent of 20mm in 3m length.

(iii) for board width over 160mm not exceeding the equivalent of lOmm in

3m length.
(c)

Twist - not exceeding the equivalent of lmm for each 25mm of width in 3m
length.

(d)

Cupping - not exceeding the equivalent of 2mm in 150mm of width.

LS.3 . Clear Face Grade


(1)
Each clear face grade sawn board shall be graded on one face and both edges. It shall
be free from decay, sawn apparently straight and square, within the tolerances specified in
section 1.3.
(2)
The boards shall be full length and shall be free of defects on one face and both edges
but imperfections shall be allowed on the back provided that they do not impair the use of the
board. Bow,spring, twist, cupping, slopping grain and want/or wane shall be permitted as for
clear grade.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

UT/~/ZAt/ON

1.5.3.1

Of TIMBER

Imperfections on the face and face edges


(a)

Borer Holes - Upto 2mm wide three in any lOOmm x lOOmm or equivalent
area of the face.

(b)

Over 2mm and upto 5mm wide-two in any 204m length of board.

1.5.4 Standard Grade


Each standard grade sawn board shall be graded on the best face, back and edges. It
shall be free f~om decay, sawn apparently straight and square within the tolerance limit.
(1)

1.5.4.1

Imperfections on standard grade


(a)

Sound knots:- Individual width or aggregate width at the worst. cross-section


through the knot(s) not exceeding one-half of the overall width of the board,
or 60mm wide, which ever is the lesser, and provided that partial encasement
of any knot does not exceed two-half of the perimeter of the knot and that any
void associated with the encasement does not exceed 5mm wide or extend
through the board. Pith up to 5mm wide shall be permitted.

(b)

Tight encased knots


(i) For board widths upto lOOmmKnots up to 20mm wide - unlimited; knots over 20mm and upto 40mm
wide- three in 3m;
(ii)

For board widths over lOOmm-

Knots upto 25mm wide - unlimited; knots over 25mm and upto 50nun wide
- three in 3m. A finger joints shall not be permitted within sOmm of a
tight encased knot.
(c)

Unsound and defective knots, knaf holes and cone holes- not exceeding lOnun
wide, not more than two such holes in 3m length of board, and not within
12mm of an edge of a board. A finger joint shall not be permitted within
50mm of any of these imperfections.

EBCS ~ 5 19!!5

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 1: MILLED PRODUCTS & SAWN BOARDS

1.5.5 Utility Grade


(1)
Each utility grade sawn board shall be graded on the best face. It shall be free from .
decay, sawn apparently straight and square within the given allowances.
(2)

C5.5.1

The board can be full length or finger jointed.

Imperfections on the face


(a)

.(b)

Sound knots-any, and provided that partial encasement of any knot does not
exceed one-half of the perimeter of the knot and that any void associated with
the encasement does not exceed 5mm width or extend through the board.
Pitch up to 5mm wide shall be permitted.
Tight encased knots
(i)
(ii)

(c)

for boards of all widths-knots up to lOmm wide unlimited;


for boards of all widths - knots over lOmm up to 50mm wide-four in
. 3m length and provided that any void associated with encasement does
not exceed one-half the perimeter of the knot or 5mm in width, or
extend through the board.

Unsound and defective knots, knot hales, cone holes, and borer holes
(i)
(ii)

upto 5mm wide-unlimited.


over 5mm and upto 20mm wide not more than two such holes in any
3m length of board. For unsound and defective knots, knot holes, cone
holes and borer holes exceeding 20mm wide.
A finger joint- shall' not be permitted within '50mm of any of these
imperfections.

(d)

Bow - evenly distributed and not exceeding the equivalent of 50mm in 3 - 4m


length.

(e)

Twist - not exceeding the equivalent of 4mm for each 25mm of width in 3m
length.

(t)

Cupping - not exceeding the equivalent of 2mm in lOOmm width.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

~.~--

-------

- -

_._~--~

~~~~--

-~

---------------

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

(g)

Overgrowth of injury - tight, not exceeding 450mm long individually. Any


void associated with the injury shall not exceed 5mm wide and shall not extend
through the board.
A finger joint shall not be permitted within 50mm of an overgrowth of injury.

(h)

End splits - not exceeding 150mm long in boards up to 150mm width.

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

---

----------~

CHAPTER

WOOD TESTING METHODS

2.1

MOISTURE CONTENT OF TIMBER

2.1.1 Scope 'and Application


(1)
This Code Standard describes methods for determining moisture content (M.C) of
timber.
(2)
It applies to solid timber, untreated with preservatives; methods for testing of ply wood,
particle board; are not included.
(3)
The methods of determining moisture content described herein do not requi,re elaborate
apparatus nor appreciable technical skilL They are suitable for field use where moisture content
determinations are routine measure, ego timber yards, joinery works, drying kilns and other
timber processing industries. samples for testing shall be selected at random through the lot.

2.1.2 Determination of Moisture Content by Oven-drying Method


(1)
The oven-drying method is the most reliable method for finding the M.C. of timber. Its
disadvantages lie in the time consuming nature of the method and the fact that it is a destructive
method because of the need to cut test pieces from the sample timber.
(2)
Where the timber contains a high resin, oil, or other volatile substances such as
creosote, the oven-drying method is liable to inaccuracy, as portion of the weight loss in oven
drying will be due to the volatilization of these materials.
(3)
In circumstances where inaccuracy caused by loss of volatiles is regarded as significant,
resort should be made either to a distillation method or to the Karl Fischer titration method.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

--'--._--~-----~---------_.-

_._ ..._._-~---' - - ' - - --~----'----~-----_._----_.


-'

UTILIZA TION 'OF. TIMBER

2.1.2.1

Test pieces for determining moisture content

(1)
The test pieces for the determination of moisture content shall consist of complete crosssections 15mm to 20mm long in the direction of the grain and free from all imperfections.
(2)

The test pieces shall be cut from the timber as follows.


(a)

If the test piece can be weighed immediately it shall be cut at a distance not less
than 0.5m from an end of the piece of the timber.

(b)

If the test piece can not be weighed immediately, a test specimen 0.3m long shall
be cut at a distance not less than 0.5m from an end of the piece of timber. This
specimen shall be protected from changes in moisture content by being completely
and tightly wrapped in waxed paper, aluminium foil or polyethylene sheeting
stored in a cool dry place within 24 hrs, a test piece as described in (i) above
shall be cut from the centre of the test specimen.

and

(c)

2.1.2.2

If the sample piece of timber is less than 1m. long ego a wooden tool handle blank
or a parquetry block, the test piece shall be cut from the centre.

Test piece for determining moisture distribution

(1)
Test pieces for determination of moisture distribution through out the thickness of a
piece of timber shall be obtained by the procedure described in the clause 2.1.2.1.
(2)

The test piece shall be a complete cross-section about 35mm. long.

2.1.2.3

Procedure

(1)
Immediately after cutting each test piece obtained in accordance with 2.1.2.1 or 2.1.2.2
and after removal of any loose splinters and sawdust by brushing or scraping, determine the
mass of the test piece by weighing on a balance sensitive to not less than 0.002 i.e. 50g test
piece shall be weighed to within 0.10gm.
(2)
The test pieces shall then be dried in a well ventilated drying oven at a temperature in
the range of 103 2c. until a constant mass is obtained. Weighing shall be carried out
immediately after removal from the oven; where the sensitive balance is used accuracy will be
improved if the test pieces are allowed to cool in a desiccator before reweighing.

10

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 2: WOOD TESTING METI!PDS

2.1.2.4

Calculation

(1)

The percentage moisture content' ofa test piece shall be determined using the following
formula.
M.e.=

w.1 -

Wo

W
X100

(2.1)

Where M.C Percentage moisture content of test piece.

WI .initial mass of test piece.

'Wo
oven dry mass of test piece.

(2~.

. The formula may also be expressed as


M.C. =

'2.1.3

2.1.3.1

[~ -1]100

(2.2)

Determination of Moisture Content by Electrical Moisture Meter Methods .

Electrical moisture meters

Electrical moisture meters are direct, quick, convenient and non-destructive means of
detennining the moisture content of timber. Commercially available electrical moisture meters
operate on one of two principles i.e capacitance meters and resistance meters.
(1)

(2)
Resistance meters are those most commonly used to determine the moisture content of
solid timber and are the only type" to be considered for the purpose of this Code Standard.

2.1.3.2

Moisture content determination

(1)
Electrical resistance moisture "meters take account of the variation of the electrical
resistance of timber with changing moisture content.
(2)

The resistance is measured between electrodes inserted into the sample piece of timber ..

(3)
The meter shall be operated strictly in accordance with the instruction provided with that
meter. The manufacturer of the moisture meter shall supply all necessary correction tables with
the meter, and only these tables shall be used to correct the meter readings.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

11

------

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

2.1.3.3

Factors affecting the accuracy of electrical moisture meters

2.1.3.3.1 Effect of Spices of Timber


Electrical resistance moisture meter readings shall be adjusted to suit the species of
timber being jested. Only the correction data supplied with the meter shall be used.
(1)

2.1.3.3.2 Effect of Thickness of Timber


(1)
Electrodes for electrical resistance moisture meters are usually about 9.5mm long and
are intended for testing stock about 25mm thick. Accurate testing of thinner stock is possible
provided firm contact is maintained between the timber and the Electrodes.
Note: by using needle electrodes more reliable results can be obtained.

2.1.3.3.3 Temperature of Timber


The electrical resistance of wood varies with its temperature Readings for Electrical
resistance moisture meters shall be corrected for temperature as directed in the instructions
supplied with the meter.
(1)

2.1.3.3.4 Contact between Timber and Electrodes


(1)
Firm contact between timber and electrodes is essential for reliable reading in general,
needle or blade electrodes should be driven to their full depth in to sound timber;
(2)
Pressure electrodes should be used on plane dressed surfaces only and adequate pressure
should be applied to ensure good contact between the electrodes and the timber surface.
Note: poor contact with any type of electrode will result in low readings.

2.1.3.3.5 Effect of wood preservatives and adhesives


(1)
Readings of electrical resistance meters rnaybe inaccurate if the timber has been treated
with wood preservatives or if the electrodes approach or penetrate adhesives.

12

EBCS 61996

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

_ _ _ _ _c

CHAPTER 2: WOOD TESTING METHODS

"2.2

DETERMINATION OF DENSITY FOR PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL 'lEIS

2.2.1 Scope and Field of Application


This Code Standard specifies a method for determining the density (ratio of mass to
volume) of wood for physical and mechanical tests both at the moisture content at the time of
. test and in the absolutely dry condition as well as the conventional density (ratio of mass in the
. absolutely dry condition to volume of the test piece with moisture content greater than or equal
to the fibre saturation point).
(1)

2.2.2 Principle
The mass of the test piece is determined by weighing and of its volume by measurement .
of its dimensions or by another method.

(1)

2.2.3 Apparatus
Measuring instrument capable of determining the dimensions of the test pieces to an
accuracy of O.lmm.
(1)

(2)

Balance capable of weighing to an accuracy of O.Olgm.

2.2.4 Preparation of Test Pieces


The test pieces shall be prepared in the form of right prisms having a square cross
section of side 20mm and length along the grain of 25 5mm. If the growth rings are more
than 4mm wide the dimension of the cross-section of the test piece shall be increased to include
not less than five growth rings.
(1)

(2)
For determination of the' conventional density it is permitted to prepare the test piece of
any geometrical shape the volume of which may be easily measured.
(3)
To determine the relation between ultimate strength and density, it is recommended that
the density be determined on test pieces made for particular tests or on test pieces for the
determination of density cut from them in the form of right prisms with the dimensions stated
above.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

13

- - - - - - - - - _ ..

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

2.2.5

Procedure

2.2.5.1

Determination of density at the moisture content at the time of test

(1)
Determine the mass of the test pieces to an accuracy ofO.Olg. Measure the sides of the
cross-section and the length of the test pieces along the axes of symmetry to the nearest O.lmrn.
The volume uf the tes; pieces may be determined by another method, to an accuracy of
0.01 em',

2.2.5.2

Determination of density in the absolutely dry condition

(1)
Dry the test pieces gradually to constant mass to minimize their deformation and
splitting. Carry out the weighing and measuring operations immediately after drying in
accordance with 2.2.5.1.

2.2.5.3

Determination of conventional density

(1) C The M.C of test pieces shall be greater than or equal to the fibre saturation point. The
test pieces may be soaked in distilled water at room temperature until no changes in dimensions
occur. Measure the dimension or volume of the test pieces according to 2.2.5.1(1): Dry the
test pieces according to 2.2.5.2 and weigh them according to 2.2.5.1.

2.2.5.4

Calculation and expression of results

(i)' ,

The.
,.. ,density Pw of each test piece at the moisture content W at the time of the test is
given, in kilograms per cubic meter (or grams per cubic centimetre) by the formula:
\

'

Pw=

Where

Mw

aw,bw' and lw
Vw

mw
mw
awxbwxlw = Vw

(2.3)

is the mass, in kilograms/or grams), of the test piece at moisture .


content W;
are the dimensions in meters (or centimetres) of the test piece at
moisture content W.
is the vol~e in cubic metres (or cubic centimetres), of the test"piece
at moisture content W.

Express the result to the nearest Skg/m3(or O.OOSg/cm3) .

(2)
When required, the density pw shall be adjusted to a 12% M.C. by the formula valid for
moisture content from 7 to 17%.

14

EBCS 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN 'BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 2: WOOD TESTING METHODS

2.3

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

(1)

The principal mechanical tests are:


1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)

Static bending

Compression parallel to the grain

Compression perpendicular to the grain

Impact bending

Hardness (Janka) indentation test

Shear parallel to grain

Cleavage

Tension parallel to grain

Toughness

(2)
Only some of the basic and applicable mechanical properties will be dealt, with in the
Code Standard.

2.3.1 Modulus of Elasticity in Bending


(1)
Size of specimens: The specimen shall have a length of 18 times the nominal depth of
the Section plus 150mm.
(2)
Measurements of test specimens shall be made to an accuracy of not less than 0.3 %,
except that in no case shall the measurements be made to less than 0.2mm, except measurements
of the radial and tangential shrinkage.specimens that shallbe made to the nearest 0.02inm.
(3)

2.3.1.1

The gauge length of sample is 71Omm.

Test procedure

(1)
The specimen shall be loaded in third point bending over a span of 18 times the nominal
.depth. If the test equipment does not permit these conditions to be achieved exactly, then the
distance between the inner load points shall be increased by an amount not greater than 1 times
the nominal depth, and the span and specimen length shall be" increased by an amount not
greater than three times the nominal depth, while maintaining the symmetry of the test. The
specimen shall be supported on rollers and a fixed knife edge reaction or by other devices which
achieve an acceptable free support condition.. r
(2)

Small plates of a length not greater than-one-half the nominal depth may .be inserted '

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

15

,y

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

between the specimen and the loading heads and supports to minimize local indentation.
(3)
Defelections shall be measured at the centre of a central gauge length of five times the
nominal depth of the section with the defect meter attached at the centre of the depth.
(4)
Load shall be applied at a continuous rate, and a record of load/deflection shall be made
so that the deflection under an increment of load can be determined to an accuracy of 1 %-or
better.
The rate of movement of the machine cross-head shall not be greater than.

(5)

R =

Where

s, (3/- 4a)/(3 11 x 1~)

(2.4)

R the rate of cross-head movement in mm/s.


a the distance between an inner load point and the nearest support point in
mm.
l the full span in mm
h the nominal depth of the section in mm.

and the equation is based on a rate of straining in the extreme fibres of 0.003 per minute.

2.3.1.2
(1)

Results
The modulus of elasticity in bending shall be calculated from the formula

Em = M'~I 2/1614 w
Where

(2)

16

(2.5)

the modulus of elasticity in bending in Nzmrrr'


the increment of load in N.
the distance between an inner load point and the nearest support point
a
inmm.
the gauge length, in mm.

L.
the second moment of area of the section determined from its actual

I
dimensions in mm"
LlW the deflection under the increment of load Mi', in mm.

Em
Mi'

Modulus of elasticity shall be calculated and recorded to three significant figures.

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 2: WOOD TESTING METHODS

2.3.2 Shear modulus


(1)
Measurements of the shear modulus of structural timber presents considerable difficulty
but values suitable for use in design can be obtained by the following method.

2.3.2.1

Single span method

This method involves the determination of modulus of elasticity (E,J and an apparent
modulus of elasticity (Em app) for the same length of the test specimen as section 2.3. l .

(1)

2.3.2.2

Test procedure

(1)
The test specimen shall be loaded in centre point bending over a span equal to the gauge
length given in clause 2.3.1.
(2)
The test specimen shall be supported on rollers and knife edge reaction or by other
devices which achieve an acceptable free support condition. Small plates of a length not greater
than one-half of the nominal depth may be inserted between the specimen and the loading heads
and supports to minimize indentation.
If the -depth to width ratio of the test specimen exceeds four, lateral restraint shall be
(3)
provided to prevent buckling. This restraint shall permit the specimen to deflect without
causing significant frictional resistance.

(4)
The loading equipment used shall be capable of measuring the load to an accuracy of
1 % or better.
(5)
Deflection shall be measured at the centre of the span with the defelectometer attached
at the centre of depth of the specimen. Load shall be applied at a continuous rate, and a record
of load/deflection shall be so made that the deflection under an increment of load can be
determined to an accuracy of 1% or better.
(6)
Care shall be taken to ensure that the maximum load applied does not exceed the
proportional limit load or cause damage to the specimen.
(7)

The rate of movement of the machine cross-head shall not be greater than
R =

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

5e/(6hxlO~)

(2.6)

EBCS - 5 1995

17

UTIUZA170!O OF TIMBER
Where R the rate of cross-head movement, in mm/s

I the span in mm

h the nominal depth of the section in mm

The equation is based on a rate of straining in the extreme fibres of 0.003 per min.

(8)

2.3.2.3
(1)

Apparent modulus of elasticity ,


The apparent modulus of elasticity shall be calculated from the formula

Emapp=M'L3/48MW

(2.7)

Where 'Emapp the apparent modulus of elasticity, in mm2


t:..F the increment of load in N.
the span in mm. ,
L
I
the second moment of area of the section determined from its actual
dimensions in mrrr'
t:.. w the deflection under the increment of load t:..F in mm
(2)

The modulus of elasticity shall be calculated and recorded to three significant figures.

2.3.2.4
(1)

Shear modulus
The shear modulus shall be calculated from the formula.
G

= 1.2h2/L2

(_1__ ~)
E mapp 'Em

Where

h
L

e.;
Em

(2 .8)

is the shear modulus, in Nzmm'


is the nominal depth of the section in mm
is the span in mm
is the apparent modulus of elasticity in Nzrnrrf
is the modulus of elasticity determined for the same test specimen in

Nzmrrr'
(2)

18

The shear modulus shall be calculated and recorded 'to two significant figures.

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

/-
I

CHAPTER 2: WOOD TESTING METHODS

2.3.3

Shear Parallel to Grain

Size of specimens: The specimen shall be 20rnm cubic.

The load must be applied at a constant rate of cross head movement of 0.635mrn1min.

The direction of shear must be parallel to the longitudinal direction of the grain.

(1)

Apparent average shearing stress


.p
2
(A A.S.S.) = bxh

Where:

(2.9)

N/mm

b x h area in shear in II1IIT

Surface of shear failure


p = maximum load in newtons causing shear.

2.3.4 Cleavage Test


The size of the specimen must be 45x20x20mm with a transverse groove at one end in
to which are slotted the tensile grips, the rate of Ioading is 0.042mrn1s and tests are made on
matched pairs of specimens to give vailures in b,oth radial and tangential planes. The failing
load is expressed as force per unit width of test sample.
(1)

(2)
A similar test in which the sample is grooved at both ends is used to measure the tensile
strength of timber perpendicular to the grain.

2.3.5 Hardness or Janka (Indentation) Test


The test requires the determination of theJoad necessary to force into the test piece to
a depth of 5,6mm the hemispherical end of the steel bar or steel ball 11.2mm in diameter. The
rate of penetration of the hardness tool shall be 0.11 mm/s.
(1)

(2)
The determination is made upon the radial and tangential faces. The radial and
tangential surfaces chosen for the test are most closely the radial and tangential direction of the
grain.
(3)

The results of each determination on both types of test piece shall be recorded.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

19

c'--- _ _

~~ .~~.~

UTlLlZA TION OF TIMBER

2.3.6

Determination of Ultimate Stress in Compression Parallel to Grain

2.3.6.1

Scope and field of application

(1)
This National Code Standard specifies a method for determining the ultimate stress of
wood in compression parallel to grain.

2.3.6.2

Principle

(1)
Determination of the ultimate stress by testing small clear test pieces in compression
parallel to grain until failure occurs, at a gradually increasing compressive load.

2.3.6.3

Apparatus

(1)
Testing machine ensuring a constant rate of loading of the test piece or constant rate of
movement of the loading head and allowing measurement of the load to an accuracy of 1 %.
(2)
Uniform loading device consisting of two self-aligning plates of hardened steel whose
spherical surfaces obtain uniform distribution of load over the ends of the test piece.
(3)
Measuring instrument, capable of determining the cross sectional dimensions of the test
piece to an accuracy of O.lmm.

2.3.6.4

Preparation of test pieces

Test pieces shall be prepared in the form of right prisms having a square cross-section
of side 20mm and length along the grain from 30 to 60mm.
(1)

2.3.6.5

Procedure

(1)
The cross-sectional dimensions at the mid-point of the long axis of the test piece, are
measured to an accuracy of O.lmm.
(2)

The test piece is loaded using the uniform-loading device.

(3)
The speed of testing (at a constant rate of loading or constant rate of movement of the
loading head of the machine.) shall be such that the test piece is broken in 1.5 to 2mm after
the start of loading. Continue the test until the test piece is broken. Determine the maximum
load (Prnax) to an accuracy in accordance with the specified accuracy.

20

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

. _ - - - _ . _ - - - - - CHAPTER 2: WOOD TESTING METHODS


(4)

After the test has been completed determine the moisture content of the piece in %.

(5)
The whole test piece shall be taken as a sample for the determination of M.C. To
determine the mean moisture content it is permissible to use only some of the 'test pieces.

2.3.6.6

Calculation and Expression of Results

The ultimate stress in compression parallel to grain (JW, of each test piece at a moisture
content w at the time of test shall be calculated, in megapascals, by the formula
(1)

p
(Jw

Where

max

(2.10)

axb

PIIID.X
the maximum load, in newtons;
a and b are the cross-sectional dimensions of the test piece, in millimetres.

The result is expressed to the nearest 0.5 MPa.


(2)
When necessary, the ultimate stress (Jw shall be adjusted to a 12 % M.c to the nearest 0.5
MPa by the following formula which is valid for a moisture content of 12 3 %
(J12

Where

(Jw

[1 + 2(w-12)]

(2.11)

the correction factor for the moisture content for the ultimate stress in
compression parallel to grain whose value shall be obtained from the
national code.
w the moisture content calculated from the test sample.

(J

(3)
The mean ultimate stress of the tested specimens shall be calculated to the nearest 0.5
MPa as the arithmetic mean of the test results of the individual test pieces.

2.4

SPECIFICATION FOR SIZES OF SAWN HARD WOOD AND SOFT WOODS


METHODS OF MEASUREMENTS

2.4.1 Scope
This Code Standard specifies a range of basic sizes in metric units, of sawn hard woods
and soft woods at 15 % moisture content with permissible deviations and the methods of
measurement of M.C. and sizes of sawn wood. It also provides a table of reductions by
manufacturing processes from the basic sawn board sizes for some end uses and products.
(1)

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

21

--~--~-------_.-

---

.-----

--------------------

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

2.4.2 Basic Sizes of Sawn Hardwoods


Basic sizes - the basic cross-sectional sizes at 15% moisture content of hard woods sawn
square on four sides shall be as given in Table 2.1.
(1)

(2)
Basic .thicknesses: The basic thickness at. 15% M.C. of hard woods sawn to random
widths square edged or waney edged, shall be as given in Table 2.1.
(3)
Basic lengths:-The basic lengths of hard woods shall be any integral multiple of 100mnt
but not less than 1m.

Table 2.1. Basic Cross-sectional Sizes of Sawn Hard Woods


Thickness
mm

Widthmm

25

50

75

100

125

150

200

225

250

300

30

35

.. x

50

50

70-75

100

x means ditto

Permissible deviations on basic sizes

(4)
Thickness and width:- For thickness and width the permissible deviations shall be as
given in Table 2.2 but minus deviations are permissible only to 10% or fewet of the pieces in
anyone thickness.

22

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

-'---~--------- --------~--~

CHAPTER 2: WOOD TESTING METHODS

Table 2.2 Permissible Deviations from Basic Sizes or Thickness or Width

(5)

Basic size
mm

Minus deviation
mm

Plus deviation

under 25

25 to 75

76 to 125

126 to 300

12

mm

Length:- minus deviation is not permissible but over length is unlimited.

(6)
Actual sizes:- The actual sizes of any piece of timber will vary with its moisture
content at the time of measurement. The dimensions given in Tables 2.1 and 2.2 apply at 15 %
moisture content, for any higher moisture content up to 30% the sizes shall be greater and for
any M.e lower than 15% the sizes may be smaller; because it is impossible to predict
accurately the shrinkage on drying of most hardwoods.

2.4.3 Methods of Measurement


(1)
The characteristics of the three product groups of hard-wood require different methods
of measurement for each group.
(2)

The groups are as follows.


(a)

Specified widths, squareedged, all pieces are of the same thickness and width
through out the length, in the parcel.

(b)

Random widths, square edged, all piecesare of the same thickness, widths are
constant in each piece but random hi the parcel.

(c)

Random widths, waney edged, all pieces are of the same thickness but widths
vary in each piece and in the parcel.
The units of measurement are, length in metres; width in millimetres, thickness
in millimetres.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

23

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

2.4.4

Sizes and Maximum Permitted Deviations

2.4.4.1

Basic sizes of sawn softwoods

(1)
The basic cross-sectional sizes shall be as shown in Table 2.3, and the basic lengths as
shown in Table 2.4
(2)
Not more than 10% of the pieces in any parcel of sawn soft wood shall have minus
deviations.
(3)
Thicknesses and widths:In thicknesses and widths not exceeding 100rnm the
maximum permitted deviations shall be -1mm, + 3mm.
(4)
In thicknesses and widths over 100nim, the maximum permitted deviations shall be
2mm, +6mm;
(5)

Lengths On lengths. there shall be no minus deviation but over length is unlimited.

2.4.4.2

Actual sizes of sawn softwoods

The actual sizes of any piece of sawn softwood will vary with its moisture content at the
time of measurement.
(1)

(2)
The size in Table 2.3 shall be measured at a 20% moisture content, for any higher
moisture content upto 30% the size shall be larger by 1% for every 5 % of moisture content in
excess of 20 % and for any lower moisture content, the size shall be smaller by 1 % for every
5 % of moisture content below 20 %.:

24

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

---"--~~-'~---------~-"-~-"~-~---------_._"--"--

--""---

--- ----------

CHAPTER 2: WOOD TESTING METHODS

TableZ.3 Basic Cross-sectional Sizes of Sawn Softwoods (in mm)


Wid t h

Thickness
20

75

100

125

150

200

250

300

25

35

50

75

100

200

300

Table 2.4 Basic Lengths of Sawn Softwood (in m)

1.50
1.80
Note:

2.10 '
2.40
3.00

3.50
A.OO

4.50

4.80
5.00
5.50

6.00
6.50

Lengths of 6.00 m and over may not be readily available.


If required special orders can be made.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EB~S - 5 7995

25

UTILIZA TlON OF TIMBER

Table 2.5 Maximum Permitted Reductions from Basic Sizes of Sawns


Softwood to Finished Size by Planning of Two Opposed Faces
(in mm)
Basic sizes

up to and
including 35

over 35 up to
and including
100 reduction
from basic sizes

over 100 up
to and
including
150

over 150

constructional timber

Matching and interlocking


boards

Applications

..

Wood' trims other than that


specified

Joinery & cabinet work

11

13

Note:

26

The reduction of width is overall the extreme size and exclusive of


any reduction of the face by the machining of a tongue or lap joint.

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

- -

CHAPTER

_._---~_._--~-

STRESS GRADING, VISUAL AND

MECHANICAL GRADING OF HARDWOODS

AND SOFTWOODS

.~"

3.1

VISUALLY STRESS-GRADED HARD WOOD FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES

3.1.1

Scope and General

This Code Standard sets out requirements for seasoned or unseasoned, sawn dressed or
sized hardwood which is intended for structural purposes, and which is tress graded by visual
means.
(l)

Note: The coverage by this Code Standard of all hardwood species does not imply their
availability or the availability of every grade in any species or species group or the availability
of seasoned material in any particular species.
(2)
Most structural hard woods are sold unseasoned but appreciable quantities of seasoned
material in some species are available in some areas.

3.1.2 Timber Species and their Strength Groups and Stress Grade Ratings
(1)

The major species covered by this Code Standard are listed in Appendix C.

(2)
Unless the purchaser orders otherwise, speciesmay be supplied mixed, but if there is
a mixture and the timber is not branded in the manner provided under the identification clause,
the stress grade applicable to the species of lowest strength present shall apply to the whole
parcel. If the species present cannot be identified the strength group rating shall be that as
given in table for mixed hardwood.

Notes: (i)

Hardwoods other than those listed in Appendix C may be graded to this


specification, but care must be taken to determine their correct strength group.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 7995

27

unUZA TlON OF TIMBER

(ii) . The durability ratings applied to the species are based 'on the natural decay

resistance of their heart wood in contact with ground. Sapwood of all species is
likely to decay when in ground contact or fully exposed to the weather' unless
treated with preservative.
(iii) The sapwood of many species is also susceptible to attack.by lyctid borers.

(3)
Sapwood may be rendered immune from such borer attack if given suitablepreservative
treatment.
3.1.3 Grades
(1)

The grades of hardwood shall be as follows


Structural
"
"
"

(2) .

Grade
"
"
"

No.1

" 2
" 3
" 4

Stud Grades, lintel grades and appearance grades are derived from the above.

Notes: (1)

The relationship between- these grade classifications, the stress grade (F) ratings
and strength group is given in Appendix C.
(ii) Stud and lintel grades are derived from the structural grades by requiring the
greater amount of straightness.
(iii) Appearance grades are derived from the structural grades by frightening the.
allowance for those factors affecting appearance.

3.1.4 Definitions and Interpretation


(1)

The terms used in this Standard shall be interpreted as defined below.

included bark

Strands of bard tissue occurring in concentric arcs.

primary rot

decay present in the living tree.

siz.ed or gauged

timber machined by fine sawing or dressing to a closer tolerance than

sawn timber.

28

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

_--~._

..

CHAPTER 3: STRESS GRADING, VISUAL AND MECHANICAL GRADING OF HARDWOOI)S


AND SOFTWOODS

stress grade

the classification of a piece of timber for structural purposes indicating


primarily the basic working stress in bending for purposes of design and
by implication the basic working stresses for other properties. The
stress grade is designated in a form such as "F8" which indicates that
for that particular material the basic working stress in bending is
approximately 8 MPa.

3.1.5

. Sizes and Tolerances

3.1.5.1

Unseasoned timber

(1)
The tolerance on the finished width and thickness of unseasoned timber shall be as
follows ..

3.1.5.2

(a)

for timber unto 6m in length and unto 200mm width 3mm

(b)

for timber unto 6mm in length and 200mm or more in width +9-3mm

(c)

for timber 6m and over in length. As for (a) or (b) above increased by one-third.

Sized or gauged timber

(1)
The tolerance on the finished width an thickness

shall be + 200mm -0.

3.1.5.3
(1)

Length
Lengths shall be not less than the ordered dimension.

3.1.6 Measurements of Imperfections

See Appendix D

3.1.6.1

Knots
(a)

Sound, oval knots, and knot holes the size shall be the width as measured between
lines enclosing the knot or hole and parallel to the arrises of the piece.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

29

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

(b)

3.1.6.1

Arris knots- the size shall be the dimension of the knot, which forms the lesser
proportion of the surfaces on which it occurs as measured between lines touching
the boundaries of the knot on both surfaces and parallel to the arris that intersects
the knots.

Bow and spring

(1)
Bow and spring shall be measured by stretching a string from an arris at one end of the
piece to the same arris at other end and measuring the maximum distance from the string to that

arris.

3.1.6.3

1\vist

(1)
Twist shall be measured by placing the piece so that three of its comers are incontaet
with a plane surface and measuring the perpendicular distance from the fourth corner to the
plane surface.
Note: If a com~ination of bow or spring and twist is present they or to be measured
separately.

3.1.6.4

~pping

(1)
Cupping shall be measured as the maximum distance of any point on
straight line joining the arrises of that surface.

3.1.6.5

~rface

from a

Wane, want and sapwood susceptible to lyctid altllCk .

Wane, want and sapwood susceptible to Iyctid attack shall be measured as the amount
by which the cross section of the piece is deficient or is Iyctid-susceptible sapwood.
(1)

3.1.6.6

Gum pockets and veins, resin pockets, overgrowths of injury and primary rot

(1)
The width of gum pockets and veins, resin pockets overgrowths of injury and primary
Tot shall be measured radially.

3.1.6.7
(1)

Internal checks
Internal checks shall be measured as their projection on the width of the piece.
)j"'

30

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 3: STRESS GRADING, VISUAL AND MECHANICAL GRADING OF HARDWOODS .


AND SOFTWOODS

3.1.7 ImperfecUODS OecuniDg Close to an Ams


(1)
Irrespective of the limits imposed by grade ~escription,.an imperfection which occurs
in proximity to an arris shall be permitted, provided that it results iii no greater a reduction in
dimension that the maximum permissible want, wand, or sapwood susceptible to Iyctid attack
lIIlowed in the grade description.

3.1.8

Grade Limitadons and Grading

3.1.8.1

Baris

(1)
The basis of a grade of structural timber shall be the.effect on the strength- of the piece
of the worst permissible imperfections. The piece shall be graded on all surfaces.

3.1.8.2

LlmitatioIlB

(1)
The grade descriptions in section 3.3 limit all imperfections known to have a significant
effect on strength and describe material on the lower limit of the particular grade. The quality
supplied shall include a fair distribution of Iilaterial ranging upward from this lower limit.

3.1.8.3
(1)

3.1.8.4
(1)

3.1.8.5

lles~Jr

If the timber is resawn longitudinally it shall be regarded.

End trimminJr
The original grading of a piece shall not be affected by subsequent end trimming.

1ime of JrradinJr

If the grading of unseasoned timber takes place some time after cutting, reasonable
allowance shall be made for defects arising from .moisture loss.

(1)

3.1.8.6

Variation within a parcel

(1)
As only the general features of a grade can be described, within any parcel a maximum
variation of 5 percent between gradins by 'individual inspectors shall be accepted.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

31

------

UTlUZA TlON OF TIMBER

3.2

IDENTIFICATION

3.2.1 Brandbmg
(1) - Where branded, each piece shall have the following information legibly and indelibly
marked thereon at least once.

(a)

Identification of the source of grading

(b)

the stress grade of the timber

(c)

If immunized or preservative treated, branding must be done accordingly.

3.2.2 Colour marking


If the stress grade is identified by colour the colour, shall be as follows.

(1)

F4Red
FS Black
F7 Blue
F8 Green
F11 Purple

F14 Orange

F17 Yellow

F22 White

F27 & Some others colour is not yet allocated.

F34

3.3

GRADE DESCRIPTIONS

3.3.1

Structural Grade No 1

3.3.1.1

General

(I)
Each piece of timber of structural grade No 1 shall be free from compression failure and
other fractures, termite galleries, end splits and included bark-intersecting an end.

(2)
Each piece shall be sawn with adjacent surfaces square to each other and lVithin the
tolerances. the ends shall be neatly trimmed.

3.3.1.2

Perml"ible imperfections

(I)
The following imperfections shall be permitted subject to the Iimitatlons herein and as
provided in Clause 3.1.7.

32

EBCS 6 1996

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 3: STRESS GRADING, VISUAL AND MECHANICAL GRADING OF HARDWOODS


AND SOFTWOODS

(a)

Knots (sound or unsound, round, oval, and arris) - Measurement not exceeding
one-seventh of the width of the surface on which they occur.

(b)

Borer holes not associated with decay


upto 3mm diameter-not exceeding twelve in any lOOxlOOmm or equivalent
area;
(ii) Over 3mm diameter or where the distance.between holes is less than twice
. their diameter-as for knots (see) (a) above).
(i)

(c)

Tight

&~m

veins

(i) not exceeding in aggregate length the length of the piece;


individual vein exceeding half the length of the piece;
(ii)
(iii) not extending from one surface of the piece to another.

n6

!'

(d)

Loose gum veins and shakes


(i)
(ii)

not exceeding 3mm wide;


aggregate length not exceeding one-tenth of the length of the piece;
(iii) not extending from one surface ofthe piece to another.

(e)

Gum pockets, latex pockets, resin pockets,and overgrowth of injury


(i)
(ii)

length-individually not exceeding three times the width of zhe surface on


which it occurs or 300mm which ever is the lesser.
:
Width:
A.
B.

if occurring on one surface only-individually not exceeding one


quarter of the width of the surface or 12mm which ever is the lesser;
If extending from one surface to another-individually not exceeding
one-eight of the width of the surface on which it occurs or 6mm,
whichever is the lesser; where the imperfection intersects an end it
shall be considered as an end split. (see Clause 3.3.1.1).

(t)

Cupping - not exceeding 1mm per 50mm of width.

(g)

Checks

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

33

._.-

----~--._----------

-_.---_._--_._ .._.

--..

_-.-~--_._-----

------_._._---_. - . - - - - - - - - - -

"I

unUZA TlON OF TIMBER

(i) surface checks


A.

on surfaces unto and including 75mm wide individually not exceeding


2mm.
on surfaces exceeding 75mm wide individually not exceeding 3mm
wide.

B.

(ii)

(h)

internal checks
Projected lengths (see Appendix D ) not exceeding one quarter of the
thickness of the piece.

Heart and heart shakes:


(i)
(ii)

where the smaller dimension is less than 175mm not permitted.


where the smaller dimension' is 175mrii or more-provided that they are
within the middle third of the cross-section of the piece.

3.3.2

Structural Grade No.2

3.3.2.1

General

(1)
Each piece of timber of structural grade No.2 shall be free from compression failures
and other fractures.
(2)
Each piece shall be sawn with adjacent surfaces square to each other and within the
tolerances specified in Clause 3.1.5. The ends shall be neatly trimmed.

3.3.2.2

Permissible imperfections

(1)
The following imperfections shall be permitted subject to the Iimitations herein and as
provided in Clause 3.1.7.

(a)

Knots (sound or unsound, round, oval and arris) - measurements not exceeding
one-quarter of the width of the surface on which they occur. (see Appendix D).

(b)

Borer holes not associated with decay


(i)

34

upto 3mm diameter-not exceeding twenty in any lOOxlOOmm or equivalent


area;

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 3: STRESS GRADING, VISUAL AND MECHANICAL GRADING OF HARDWOODS


AND SOFTWOODS

(ii)

over 3mm diameter-as for knots (see (a) above).

(c)

Tight gum veins-unlimited.

(d)

Loose gum veins and shakes


not exceeding 3mm wide;
(ii) aggregate length not exceeding one-sixth of the length of the piece;
(iii) not extending from one surface of the piece to another.

(I)

(e)

Gum pockets, latex pockets, resin pockets and over growths of injury
(i)
(ii)

length-individually not exceeding three times the width of the surface on


which it occurs or 300mm, which ever is the lesser.
Width
A.

i
I

B.

(f)

Checks
(i)
(ii)

_(g)

surface checks - unlimited.


internal checks - projected lengths (see Appendix D) not exceeding one
third of the thickness of the piece.

Heart and heart shakes


(i)
(ii)

(h)

If occurring on one surface only - individually not exceeding one


third of the width of the surface on which it occurs or 20mrn which
ever is the lesser;
If extending from one surface to another-individually not exceeding
one-quarter of the width of the surface on which it occurs or 12mm,
which ever is the lesser; Where the imperfection intersects an end it
shall be considered as an end.splits, (see U) below.)

where the smaller dimension is less than 175mm - not permitted;


where the smaller dimension is 175mm or more - provided that the heart
is within the middle third of the cross-section of the piece.

Included bark
(i)

intersecting an end - individual strands not exceeding 75mm long;

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDAfiD

ESCS - 5 1995

35

0-

""

"_____

__

_ _"

-~ --~-~~~_.~~~-~.

"_"

unUZA TlON OF TIMBER

not intersecting and end, but within 600mm of an end - individual strands
not -exceeding 150mm long;
(iii)
intersecting an end and not within 600mm of an end, but within the
middle half.of the depth-individual strands not exceeding 300mm long and
not less,than ~OOnun apart;
(iv) not intersecting an end and hot within 600mm of and end, but outside the
middle half of the depth - individual strands not exceeding 600mm long and
not less than 300mm apart.
(ii)

not

(j) Endsplits - equal in aggregate to the face width or 100mni, whichever is the lesser.

3.3.3

Structural Grade No.3

3.3.3.1

General

Each piece of timber or structural grade NO.3 shall be free from compression failures
and other fractures.

(1)

(2)
Each piece shall be sawn with adjacent surfaces square to each other and within the
tolerances specified in Clause 3.1.5. The ends shall be neatly trimmed.

3.3.3.2

Permissible imperfections

The following imperfections shall be permitted subject to the limitations here in and as
provided in Clause 3.1.7.
(1)

(a)

Knots (sound or unsound, round, oval and arris) - measurement not exceeding
one-third of the width of the surface on which they occur (see Appendix D).

(b)

Borer holes not associated with decay


(i)
(ii)

(c)

36

upto 3mm diameter - unlimited provided that the distance between the holes
is at least twice their diameter;
over 3mm diameter or where the distance between holes is less than twice
their diameter - as for knots (see (a) above).

Tight gum veins.- unlimited.

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

- - - - - - _ .- - - - _ .

---~---.-

CHAPTER 3: STRESS GRADING, VISUAL AND MECHANICAL GRADING OF HARDWOODS


AND SOFTWOODS

(d)

Loose gum veins and shakes


not exceeding 3mm wide;
(ii) aggregate length not exceeding one-quarter of the length of the piece;
(iii) where they intersect an end and extend from surface to surface they shall
be considered as end splits (see (h) below);
(iv) not extending from one surface of the piece to another.

(i)

(e)

Gum pockets, latex pockets, resin pockets, and overgrowths of injury


(i)
(ii)

length - individually not exceeding three times the width of the surface on
which it occurs or 300mm which ever is the lesser;
width
A.

B.

(t)

Checks
(i)

(ii)

(g)

surface checks - unlimited;


internal checks - projected lengths (see appendix D) not exceeding one-half
of the thickness of the piece.

Heart and Heart Shakes.


(i)

(ii)

(h)

If occurring on one surface only-individually not exceeding one-half


of the width of the surface on which it occurs or 25mm, whichever
is the lesser;
If extending from one surface to another-individually not exceeding
one-third of the width of the surface on which it occurs or 20mm,
which ever is the lesser; where the imperfection intersects an end it
shall be considered as an end split (see (h) below).

where the smaller dimension is less than 175mm-not permitted;


where the smaller. dimension is 175mm or more provided that they are
within the middle third of the cross-section of the piece.

End splits - aggregate length at each end not exceeding 1.5 times the face width
or 150mm, which ever is the lesser;

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

37

unUZA TlON OF TIMBER

3.3.4

Structural Grade No.4

3.3.4.1

~n,~

(1)
Each piece of timber of structural Grade No.4 shall be.free from compression failures
and other fractures. Each piece shall be sawn with adjacent surfaces square to each other and
within the tolerances specified in Clause 3.1.5. The ends shall he neatly trimmed.

3.3.4.2

P,rmissibl, imperf,ctions

(1)
The following imperfections shall be permitted subject to the limitations herein, and as
provided in Clause 3.1.7
(a)

Knots. (Sound or unsound, round, oval and arris) measurement not exceeding
three-eights of the width of the surface on which they occur (see Appendix D).

(b)

Borer holes not associated with decay


(i)
(ii)

upto 3mm diameter - unlimited provided that the distance between the holes
is at least twice their diameter. ,
over 3mm diameter or where the distance between holes is less than twice
their diameter - as for knots (see (a) above).

(c)

Tight gum veins - unlimited.

(d)

Loose gum veins and shakes.


not exceeding 3mm wide.
(ii) aggregate length not exceeding one-third of the length of the piece;
(iii) not extending from one surface to another;
(iv) where they intersect an end and extend from surface to surface they shall
be considered as end splits (see (h) below).
(i)

(e)

Gum pockets, latex pockets resin pockets, and over


(i)
(ii)

38

~rowths

of injury

length-individually not exceeding three times.the width of the surface on


which it occurs or 300mm which ever is the lesser;
width

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 3: STRESS GRADING, VISUAL AND MECHANICAL GRADING OF HARDWOODS


AND SOFTWOODS

A.

B.

(t)

Heart and Heart shakes


(i)
(ii)

(g)

If occurring on one surface only - individually not exceeding one-half


of the width of the surface on which it occurs or 30mm which ever
is the lesser; where it intersects an end the imperfection shall be
considered as an end split.
If extending from one surface to another-individually not exceeding
one-third of the width of the surface on which it occurs or 25mm,
whichever is the lesser.

where the smaller dimension is less than 175mm - not permitted


where the smaller dimension is 175mm or more provided that it is within
the middle third of the cross-sectionof the piece.

Included bark - . '/

.<) ~ . '
.",

..

(i)
(ii)

intersecting an end-individual strands not exceeding 200mm long;


not intersecting and end, but within 600mm of the end- individual strands
not exceeding 400mm long;
(iii) not intersecting an end and not within 600mm of an end, but within the
middle half of the depth-individual strands not exceeding 800mm long and
not less than 300mm apart;
(iv) not intersecting an end and not within 600mm of an end, but outside the
middle half of the depth strands unlimited if tight.
(h)

End splits - aggregate length at each end not exceeding 1.5 times the face width
or 15Omm, whichever is the lesser.

(j)

Primary rot and termite galleries - on the surface only and provided that the effect
is not greater than for wane, want and sapwood susceptible to lyetid attack or
gum pockets.

_ 3.3.5 Stud Grades


(1)
Each piece of timber of stud grade shall comply with the requirements for structural
grade No.1, No.2, No.3 or No.4 see Clauses 3.3.2, 3.3.3 and 3.3.4, except as varied below .

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

. EBCS - 51995

39

UTILIZA TlON OF TIMBER

(a)

Spring - not exceeding the following


In a 2.4m length
6mm.
In a 2.7m length
8mm
In: a 3m length

(b)

lOmm

Twist - not exceeding8mm per 100rnm of width. Studs to these grades are
.suitable for lise in length up to 3m and widths and thicknesses up to 100mm.

Note: In addition to studs, this material is also appropriate for wall plates.

3.3.6 Lintel Grades


(1)
Each piece of timber of lintel grade shall comply with the requirements for structural
grade No 1, No 2, No3 or N04 (see Clauses 3.3.1, 3.3.2, 3.3.3 and 3.3.4), except as varied
below:
(2)

Bow - not exceeding the following:


In a 2.4m length
In a 2.7m length
In a 3m length
In a 3.3m length
IIi a 3.6m length
In a 3. 9m length
In a 4.2m length
In a 4.5m length and over

6mm
8mm
.1Omm
12mm
14mm
16mm
18mm
20mm

3.3.7 Appearance Grades


(1)
Each. piece of timber of appearance grade shall comply with the requirements for
. structural grade No1 No2, No3 or N04 (see clauses 3.3.1,3.3.2, 3.3.3 and 3.3.4), except that
the following imperfections shall not be permitted;
(a) ... Loose, unsound and defective knots.
. (b)

40

Knot holes

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

'r .

---_..

_._-~

CHAPTER 3: STRESS GRADING, VISUAL AND MECHANICAL GRADING OF HARDWOODS


AND SOFTWOODS

(c)

Borer holes larger than 3mm.

(d)

Loose gumveins and shakes.

(e)

Gumpockets, latexpockets, resin pockets, and overgrowths of injury..


. Checks wi(ler than 1mm.

(t)

(g)

primary rot and termite galleries.

(h)

wane, want'and sapwood susceptible to lyctid attack

(i)

included bark.

In addition the amount of allowable blow, spring and twist is .limited to 75 percent of
(2)
the values given in Appendix D.

3.4

MECHANICAL STRESS GRADING OF TIMBER

3.4.1

Specification for Mechanical Stress Grading of Timber

3.4.1.1

Scope tuJd fnterprellltion

(1)
This Code Standard applies to mechanically stress graded timber intended for. use in
structures requiring tuber of predictable strength and stiffness performance.
.

(2)
.The specification covers the branding of the stress graded timber, the recommended
stress grades to be adopted, the additional visual grading requirements and dimensional
tolerances for material intended to be mechanically stress graded.
3.4.1.2

(1)

1>ejinUions
The terms used in this Code Standard shall be interpreted with the following: definitions.

basic 'Working stress . The stress appropriate to an arbitrarily chosen but constant basic
reference set of conditions. It is derived 'from the. known strength
properties of a timber, due allowance having been made for such factors
as material variability, long duration loading, grade of tiber and a safety
factor.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

41

UTIUZA TION OF TIMBER

certifying engineer

A registered engineer who after due inspection and adequate re


inspection and examination of test procedures and results will certify ~s
opinion as to compliance with the standard for mechanically stress
graded timber.

grade

The lowest class for modulus of elasticity as a plank indicated on the


piece.

gradingperWd

The duration of mechanical grading operation carried out on the one day
using the one grading programme for the one size of timber.

grading programme

specifies the modulus of elasticity as a plank (EP) levels required to be


discriminated by the machine in order to produce timber to specified
stress grades.

masten

standard gauges or other standard measuring devices used to check


timber stress grading procedures.

IlUC1uJnklllly BITe"

grrukd timber

any piece of timber to which specific values for basic working stress In .
banding and mean niodUlus of elasticity have been assigned based on the
minimum modulus of elasticity as a plank measured by the grading
machine.

operiltor

the organization that operates the timber stress grading machine.

,ample

a sample length of machine stress graded timber selected from a batch


or consignment.

'lrell

grade

a value assigned to a piece of timber to indicate the basic working stress


in bending for the purpose of structural timber design and by implication
the basic working stresses for other properties normally used in
engineering design.

te,t 'pan

the span over which a mechanical stress grading machine grades a piece
of timber.

te,t ,pecimm

a prepared piece of timber for testing taken from the sample.

42

ESCS - 6 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

-----~~_-----

CHAPTER 3: STRESS GRADING, VISUAL AND MECHANICAL GRADING OF HARDWOODS


AND SOFTWOODS

verification stick

3.4.1.3

a piece of timber or other suitable material of known modulus of


elasticity at all points along its length of known width and thickness.

mechanical stress grades

The machine shall be capable of producing one or more of the following mechanical

stress grades:

M.S.G.Fll

M.S.G.F6 (No.1 framing grade, or standard building grade. M.S.G.F4.).

In addition, material which has a modulus of elasticity as a plank less than the minimum

required for F4 shall be designated as box Grade.

(1)

3.4.1.4

Identification and marking

3.4.1.4.1 Identification
Stress grade colour marking unless other wise specified shall be applied to each piece
of timber. Colours for marking stress graded timber shall be
M.S.G. Fll-- purple
M.S.G. F6 (No.1 framing Grade, or Standard Building Grade)-- Black
M.S.G F4-- Yellow
M.S.G Box Grade --Red.
(1)

(2)
Marking shall be either intermittently along the piece, at one end of the piece, or both.
In cases where docking removes or alters the identification and marking or both, the timber no
longer compels with this standard.

3.4.1.4.2 Marking
Each piece of timber mechanically stress graded in accordance with this standard shall
be legibly and indelibly marked on one face or edge by:

(1)

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

The name or identification mark of the operator


An indication of the 'stress grade of the tiber consistent with its identification of
this standard for example,' FII or an appropriate colour mark.
An indication of the method of grading, for example, M.S,G
The actual cross-sectional size at time of grading.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 7995

43

---_._---._-----------------

'.

. YTlUZA TION OF. TIMBER

3.4.1.5

Visl;UJl inspection of mechanically stress graded timber

(1)
Each piece of mechanically stress graded timber shall be visually graded for live insect
in fetation! and pith on nailing edges ,namely, defects which affect the fixing and general
performance of the timber in service but which are not evaluated by the machine grading
process.
(2)' Each piece of mechanically stress graded timber shall comply with visual gradipg
requirements as follows:
(a)

.Over the full length of the piece


Except in. Box Grade, the grade of the piece with respect to bow, crook, twist,
wane, and bark and- resin pockets, shall conform to the requirements for No:2
Framing Grade In Group iv.

(b)

Within 600mm from ends


Where a visual defect in this section:
(i)

(ii)

3.4.1.6

is the worst defect in the piece, and


does not conform to the grading rules for the visual grade equivalent to the
machine grade piece then either the defect shall be eliminated by docking,
or else the piece shall be down graded to the visual grade appropriate to the
defect.

Dimensional tolerances

(1)
The dimensions for which the grading machine has been set shall not deviate from the
dimensions of the timber to be grade by more than the following tolerances -2mm,+Omm.

3.4.2

Rules for Mechanical Stress Grading of Timber

3.4.2.1

Scope and interpretation

These rules apply only to procedures of mechanical stress grading by machines which
measure the stiffness of face loaded timber as a simply supported beam over a short load span,
such a load being applied sequentially along the whole of the length of the piece.

(1)

44

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

---------------

CHAPTER 3: STRESS GRADING, VISUAL AND MECHANICAL GRA.o'NG OF HARDWOODS


AND SOFTWOODS

(2)

3.4.2.2
(1)

The rules set out the following:


(a)

Minimum calibration and verification requirements;

(b)

Minimum requirements to ensure the continuous correct operation of the timber


grading machine under industrial conditions;

(c)

A quality assurance system which is to be applied to all timber graded to this


standard;

(d)

Method of determining grade limits

Verification of stress grading machines


Accuracy of stress grading machines indicating a range in which E lies.

(2)
A stress grading machine that indicates a range in which the value of "E" lies shall be
verified as follows:

...!

(3)
Twenty pieces of each stress grade for which the machine is set to operate or for which
the operator intends to grade as specified, shall be selected at random by the certifying engineer
from timber which has been graded by the machine to be verified. From these pieces, bending
test specimens shall be cut according to the following rules:
(a)

The mid-point of each test specimen shall include the lowest grade zone of the
graded piece of timber and the associated defect, if any.

(b)

If the graded piece contains more than one lowest grade zone, then the one to be
chosen for the test specimen shall be the one containing the point of worst visual
grade.

(c)

Each bending test specimen shall have a minimum length equal to the test span
-plus 200mm.

(d)

As soon as practicable, the testing authority shall test each bending test specimen
in bending on the flat (see Appendix E), the load being applied in a manner
equivalent to that in which it is normally applied in the stress grading machine.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

45

UTlLJZA'T10N OF TIMBER

The moisture content of each test specimen at the time of test shall be not less
than 30 % in the case of green timber, and shall be within 2 % of the moisture
content of that piece at the time of grading in the case of dry timber.
During the testing the extreme fibre stress in bending shall not appreciably exceed
the stress applied during mechanical stress grading.
(e)

For every test specimen the E value for constant moment of inertial, as calculated
from the test results, shall not be outside the spe~ified limits of the E value, for
the particular grade by more than the following percentages of the E value
concerned.

Grade minimum or
maximum E(GPa)
Above 7.99
5.50 to 7.99
below 5.50

3.4.2.3

Allowed % Above
maximum

Allowed % below
minimum

15.00
11.00
7.5

10.0
7.5
5.0

Operator verification of mechanical grading operations

3.4.2.3.1 Checking procedure


(1)
Every operator mechanically stress grading ,timber to comply with this Standard shall
ensure that the machine is operating satisfactorily at all times.
(2)
Verification sticks, selected in accordance with Appendix F, shall be used in order to
achieve this objective. The verification sticks shall be used according to the following rules.

46

(a)

A minimum of 5 verification sticks shall be passed immediately before and after


each grading period. There shall be at least one stick passed for every grade for
which the machine is programmed, For each verification stick the number of
points in each grade zone recorded by the machine shall correspond to the number
of points in each grade zone shown on the stiffness profile diagram for that stick.

(b)

If a size of timber is to be graded for which there are no verification sticks and
there are available verification sticks for an equivalent programme, then the
machine shall be checked using these sticks as indicated above.and the machine
immediately rest to suit the size to be graded.

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUfI:DING CODE STAiNo"ARD

CHAPTER 3: STRESS GRADING, VISUAL AND MECHANICAL GRADING OF HARDWOODS


AND SOFTWOODS

(c)

Each verification stick shall be legibly and indelibly branded on one edge with
the following information:
(i)
(ii)

(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(d)

machine serial number (for Example ETS 01.)


stick serial number
species
size of stick
programme
machine grade of stick
cylinders used and pressure to be applied
arrow to indicate direction of feed into machine.

Keeping of records. The operator shall keep a register which must contain the
following information for each grading operation.
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)

date of grading operation


machine serial number
material species and whether green or dry
size of material (actual)
programme used
pressure applied including all relevant details such as cylinder used, and so
on
(vii) serial number of the verification sticks used
(viii) Serial number of the quality control sample
(ix) machine supervisor's signature.
(3)

3.4.2.4

This register shall be available for inspection by the certifying engineer


Quality assurance of mechanically stress graded timber

3.4.2.4.1 Quality assurance


(1)
Every operator mechanically stress grading timber in accordance with this standard shall
take quality assurance test specimens of the mechanically stress graded timber and shall have
them tested by the testing authority. The test results shall be checked by the operator and by
the certifying engineer to ensure that the modules of elasticity values do not fall below the grade
minimum values by more than the allowable percentages. Copies of all test results will be held
by

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

47

~~~- -----~----

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

(a)
(b)
(c)

the operator
the testing authority
the certifying engineer.

3.4.2.4.2 Method of quality assurance


For the purpose of quality assurance the operator shall supply the testing authority with
test specimens of timber complying with the following requirements.
(1)

(a)

Selection of qualityassurance specimens.


(i)

At least one test specimen shall be taken from a sample graded during each
grading period or at a rate of 1 in 1000 which ever is the lesser.
(ii) Test specimens are to be taken so that all grades for which the machine is
set to operate are almost equally represented.
(iii) Only one test specimen shall be cut from anyone piece of timber, and shall
contain the zone of minimum grade.
(iv) If the piece of timber from which the test specimen is to be cut contains.
more than one lowest grade zone, then the one to be chosen for the quality
assurance specimen shall contain the point of worst visual grade.
(v) All graded points along the length of the piece shall be representatively
sampled.
(vi) The length of the quality assurance test specimen shall be a minimum of
1.lm with the minimum grade zone at the centre point.
(b)

Marking. Each quality assurance test specimen obtained in accordance with (a)
above shall have the following in formation marked indelibly on it.
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)

The operator's name or recognized code.


The machine serial number.
The date of sampling.
The serial number of the test specimen.
The species-either full name or agreed abbreviation.
The dimensions of the cross- section for which the stress grading machine
was programmed to grade the test specimen.
(vii) The grade of the test specimen as determined by the grading machine at the
time it passed through the stress grading machine.
(viii) Position of the minimum grade point along the length.
(ix) Any information specifically requested by the testing Authority as follows:

48

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

~-----

--~

.. _--

CHAPTER 3: STRESS GRADING, VISUAL AND MECHANICAL GRADING OF HARDWOODS


AND SOFTWOODS

programme used; force applied; in the case of dry timber, the mean
moisture content at the time of grading.
(c)

Quality assurance test specimens shall be protected from moisture content change
and protected from damage in transit.

(d)

Quality assurance test specimens shall be delivered to the testing Authority as


frequently as practical but, no later than one month after grading;

3.4.2.4.3 Testing of quality test specimens

~(1)

The testing Authority shall carry out the following tests on each test specimens
(a)

(i)

(ii)
(iii)

Measure the moisture content of dry timber at the laboratory by the method
described
In the case of timber described as 'green' check that the moisture content
is not less than 30 %.
In the case of timber described as 'dry' check that the moisture content at
the laboratory is within 2 % of the moisture content at the time of grading.
This check shall be made by weighing the timber at the place of grading
immediately after grading and again at the laboratory immediately prior to
testing.

(b)

measure the thickness and width to O.lmm.

(c)

Evaluate the modules of elasticity as a plank. (see Appendix E).

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

49

OHtlONtI.1S 300:1 9NI07Jn9 NtllcJOIH.13

966l 9 - S:193

OS

[}INV'IH U3:'I A'I'IVNOlLN3:.lNI 3DVd 81m]

H39WI.1 :/0 NOI.1 tlZI7I.1n

~----~-

--

~---

---~--_._---_

..

CHAPTER

TIMBER FRAMES

4.1

SCOPE AND GENERAL

4.1.1 Scope
(1)
This
Code.
Standard provides niles for the selection, placement
and fixing of the various'
.
.
structural timber mem~~rs used in the construction of conventional building frames intended to
be used for residential and light commercial or: industrial purposes and similar structures. It
describes procedures, .which are designed toprevent misuse of timber or creation of an
environment which might adversely affect the durability of the structure.

4.1.2 Application
.!

(1)
Framing and fastening methods the stresses used in the calculation of maximum spans
shown in the tables were derived specifically 'for conventional timber framing and are not

applicable generally to other forms of construction.


(2)
Not-with-standing the above this standard does not restrict the introductionof other
framing and fastening methods or materials where it can be shown to the satisfacti~~. of the
building Authority. that this satisfy the performance requirements met by the materials and
methods described here in.
~.

(3)
In all cases the programme of calculations'used to obtain the maximum permissible spans
for timber section listed in various tables is designed to obtain the greatest economy of timber
consistent with the strength and stiffness required for the given use or purpose of that member.
(4)
In consequence, when selecting members, particularly those of smaller cross-section,
from tables of maximum span the use is warned that it may be necessary to give close attention
to factors, other than load-carrying ability .
(5)
The need to provide room for drillings or:notchings by service trades and adequate width
of grounds for jointing or fixing of lining together with the need to ensure that sufficient width
and thickness of timber are available at joints and bearings to accept the required gauge and

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

51

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

number of fixing nails, may require the selection of members greater in size than those which
are needed for structural strength alone.

4.1.3 Terms and Definitions


(1)

The terms used in this Standard shall have the following meanings:

grade

grade shall mean the structural quality of a timber section which has
here in been determined in accordance with Ethiopian Standard visual
grading rules appropriate to its Species.
Where no grading rule exists for seasoned timber such material shall be
graded in accordance with the visual grading rules for unseasoned
timber of the same Species.

stress grade

stress grade shall mean a value assigned to a piece of timber to indicate,


for purposes of structural design, the set of basic stresses appropriate to
that piece. The concept of stress grade has been introduced into the
tables in this standard as being a convenient way of describing the
combined effect which species and qualities will have on the strength of
a timber section. Stress grade is designated in the form of a number
preceded by the letter "F". (See Appendix G).

spacing

spacing, where used in reference to structural timber members shall


mean their centre-to-centre distance apart unless other wise indicated.

span

span; where used in reference to structural timber members or


assemblies, shall mean the face-to-face distance between points capable
of giving full support to such members or assemblies in particular, rafter
spans shall be measured as the spacing between points of support along
the length of the rafter and not as the horizontal projection of this
distance unless other wise indicated.

two-storey construction

two-storey Construction shall mean a construction where the structure


of the lower storey is of timber framing and supports wall, floor and
roof loads of an other storey.

tiled roofing

tiled roofing shall include natural slates or terracotta or concrete tiles.

52

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 4.. TIMBER FRAMES

4.2

STRESS GRADES

(1)

Refer to Chapter III of this Standard for different types of grades.

4.3

SIZES

4.3.1

Alternative Timber Sizes

(1)
For seasoned timberalternative dimensions may be used in accordance with the schedule
give in Table 4.1.

Table 4.1 Schedule of Alternative Timber Dimensions


Allowable alternative dimensions
Nominal Unseasoned
Timber Dimensions
25
38
50
75
100
125
150
200

Note:

Min. actual seasoned


soft wood (mm)

Min. actual Seasoned


Hard Wood (mm)

19
35
42
70
90
120
140
190

19
30
40
60
80
105
135
185

Dimensions in Column 1 are "Nominal", actual unseasoned dimensions may


be up to 4mm less for soft wood and 3mm less for hard wood. Where nailing
is critical these dimensions may need to be increased.

4.3.2 Sizes in Tables


The appropriate cross-section to be used in conjunction with the relevant tables contained
in the supplements to this Code Standard shall equal the nominal sizes less only the tolerance
indicated in the foot note to each Table.

(1)

ETHIOPIAN B'UILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

53

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

4.4

SPANS

Where it is proposed to use timber members over long spans it should be realized that
certain practical difficulties may arise during construction, and special techniques may need to
be developed to ensure a satisfactory result. For example, variations in spring, bow, and twist
rriay prevent a flat surface from, being obtained unless the members are restrained by being
securely fastened to cross or bracing members. However, such bracing may be required only
temporarily if the permanent construction provides adequate restraint. Absence of such restraint
may also lead to difficulties in nailing due to flexibility of slender members.
(1)

It should also be noted that when long spans or wide spacings are used the traditional
(2)
nailingrequirements given herein may be inadequate and special attention may need to be given
to the strength of joints or connections, particularly those between roof and wall members.
Wind produces uplift on the lee-ward side of all roofs, and on the wind ward side of roofs less
than about 30 degree slope, so failure to provide strong enough connections may lead to
dislodgment of the roof.

4.5

STORAGE AND HANDLING OF TIMBERS

(I)
No Timbers or Timber products shall be stored or handled in such manner as would be
detrimental to their satisfactory performance when fabricated into the building.
(2)
Precautions which should be observed in the handling and storage of timber are given
in Appendix H.

54

EBCS ~ 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 4: TIMBER FRAMES

STRAP
RAFTER

CLEAT

HANGING 8EAM

.......

\~\\

'"
FASCIA

' ...._1

SOFF.IT I3EARER

\\
\
\ \\
/" f.
n
t
i l

Ik~,

'0~
\~~\

fil . I IIH--H~

\\\

\~

JACK JOIST

Hl

TOP WALL PLATf

\-1

1/

LINTEL

II

II

LEDGER

III

1.hI

8RACE.

NOGGING

I- 11111
I

I II

IIII~

CEILING JOIST

STUD

I+W-HI--I-i

II

JAM8 STUD

III

II

SILL TRIMMER

III-II

"

'.

BOTTOM
WALL PLATE
FLOOR

JOIST

~BEARER

"

ANT CAl
----~. STUMP

/-Ll}-i.1_~----~~--SOLEPLATE
II

II

~===il

Figure 4.1 Terms Applying to Framing Generally

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 6 1996

55

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

--0

.4

(a) HIP ROOF

(b) GABl.E ROOF


1. Top Plate
2. Ceiling Joist
3. Collar Tie
4. Rafter, Common.
6. Rafter, Jack or
Crown End

6. Rafter, Cripple
7. Rafter, Creeper
6. Rafter, Hlp
9. Rafter, Valley
10. Rldgeboard
11. Unl!8fpurlln

12. Roof Strut


13. Outrigge
14. Nogglng
16. Raking Plale
16. Railer, Barge or
Verge

Figure 4.2 Terms Applying to Roof Ft~

56

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

..

~--------~-----. ----,-~_.

---'--.

~---._.

-----

CHAPTER 4: .TIMBER FRAMES

1. Top Plale
2. Pilching Plait>

Figure

4.6

4.3 Tenns Applying to

3. Curtailed Rafter
4. Creeper Railer

Scotch Valley Framing

SUB STRUCTURE

Reference is made in this section to some practices and materials which are the
responsibility of trades other than those concemedwith the fabrication and erection of timber
frames. Such reference is necessary because the observance of these practices and the correct
usage of these materials are required for the satisfactory performance of timbers in frames with
which they are associated.
(1)

4.6.1

Site Preparation

The clearing and drainage of the site on which the building will ~e erected shall be
adequate to ensure protection of any timber framing' or components from the effects of
prolonged dampness or exposure to fungal or insect attack. In addition to any requirements laid
down by the Building Authority, the precautions given in Appendix J should be observed.
(1)

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

57

UTIUZA TION OF TIMBER

4.6.2 Ventilation of Subfloor Spaces


(1)
No unventilated spaces shall be permitted beneath floors constructed from or supported
by timber.
(2)
The requirements of the Building Authority as regards clearances and provision of
ventilators shall be followed.
Note: Adequate subfloor ventilation is essential, ventilation openings should be evenly
distributed in sub-structure walling both internally and around the perimeter of the
building with special attention being given to the avoidance of unventilated areas at
corners where the site is such that the earth beneath the tloor will be permanently damp
or is likely to be seasonally damp for lengthy periods, the amount of required ventilation
may need to be increased or the ground beneath the floor should be covered with a
moisture impervious membrane. Special requirements are necessary for particle board
flooring.

4.6.3 Termite Protection


In any area in which the hazard of termite (white ant) attack is known to exist,
protection against such attack shall be provided, dependent on site conditions and the design of
the building.
(1)

(2)
Regardless of the method of protection adopted the design and construction of the
substructure of any building likely to be subject to subterranean termite attack should be such
as to facilit~te regular inspection for possible infestation.

4.6.4 Foundations
(1)
The tables of recommended footing sizes and stamp spacings given in this section have
been prepared on the
basis of an allowable foundation bearing pressure of 100kPa which has
.
been taken to be a safe average for conditions generally encountered.

(2)
Where, however, the allowable bearing pressure is less than 100 kPa or where
conditions are such that foundation movement may occur, the size and arrangement of,.the
footings shall be altered to correspond with the established local practice or shall be calculated
specifically for the area in accordance with established engineering principles.

58

ESCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

--~---------

CHAPTER 4: TIMBER FRAMES

(3)
Where the allowable bearing pressure is known to exceed 100 kPa,. the size and
arrangement of the footings may be calculated in accordance with engirceering principles; and
the size and arrangement so 'calculated used with the approval of the Building Authority in place
of-those given in this standard.

4.6.5 Footings
(1)
Except where very high bearing pressures are permissible, such as on rock or other
fOlmdation materials for which the safe bearing stress exceeds 500 kPa, a sole plate or other
footing shall be provided, under each stump, post or wall to spread the load on the foundation

material.
(2)
Footings regardless of their material or type, shall be so proportioned that they will
distribute evenly to the foundation material the vertical and lateral -loads from _the building and
shall provide sufficient -bearing area in relation to the carrying capacity of the foundation
material to prevent significant settlement or other movement of all parts of the structure which
they support.

4.6.6

Timber Stumps and Posts

4.6.6.1

Selection and installation

(1)
Timber-Stumps and posts shall be selected and installed in accordance with the
requirements of such Clauses given hereunder as are relevant to their species and conditions of
usage.

4.6.6.2

Minimum cross-section

The minimum nominal cross-section used for timber stamps and posts shall be
100x100mm or 115mm diameter round sections.

(1)

4.6.6.3

Protection

(1)
Where preservative treated timbers are used the end in contact with the ground shall not
be docked or trimmed after treatment. All posts either treated or untreated the upper ends of
which are not otherwise completely shielded from exposure to sun and rain, shall have adequate
weather protection such as that provided by a galvanized metal and cap.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE-STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

59

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

4.6.7

Timbers in Contact with Ground

4.6.7.1

Sawn timber of durability Class 1

Sawn stumps and posts of any timber species of Durability Class 1 (see Appendix K)
which will be indirect contact with the ground may be used.
(1)

(2)
In certain areas other species. not of Durability Class 1 such as Jarrah (Eucalyptus
marginata) and river red gum (E. Camaldulenis) have also proven suitable and may be used with
permission of the Building Authority.

4.6.7.2. Natural round timber of durability Class 1


Natural round timbers of durability Class 1 which will be in contact with the ground
may be used, provided that they are straight and free from rot, deep splits and knots exceeding
one third of the diameter of their section and provided also that all sap wood is preservative
treated.
(1)

(2)
Alternatively all sapwood shall be removed from that portion of the timber which will
be in contact with the ground.

4.6.7.3

Natural round timber not of durability Class 1

(1)
Natural round timbers not of durability Class 1 which will be in contact with the ground
may be used provided that they are straight and free from rot ,deep spilits and knots exceeding
one-third of the diameter of their section and provided also that they have been impregnated
with an approved preservative.

4.6.8 Timber Soleplates or Footings


Sawn timber soleplates maybe used as footings to timber stamps provided that they are
proportioned so as not to project beyond any face of the stamp which they support by more than
their own thickness, taken across the grain, or three times their own thickness, taken along the
grain, and provided also that they comply with the following requirements as appropriate.
(1)

(a)

60

Durability Class 1 Soleplates of any timber species of Durability Classl (see


Appendix K) may be used provided that they comply with the grade description
for soleplates.

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

.-------------

---_.

__ ...- .-

..

- -------------

CHAPTER 4: TIMBER FRAMES

(b)

In certain areas,other species not of Durability Classl, such as Jarah (E


marginata) and river red fun (E.Camaldulensis) have also proven suitable and may
be used with permission of the Building Authority.

4.6.9 Sizes of Footings and Soleplates


' \ <,

Table 2 gives minimum bearing areas and recommended sizes for footingsand soleplates
suitable for use under conditions of loading and spacing given in the tables forming the
supplements to this standard, for bearers supporting load bearing walls, and for bearers
supporting floor joists only. The maximum spacing for each footing type is given in Table 3.
(1)

4~6.10

Lateral Stability

(1)
Height and embedment unless provision is made for their adequate bracing in accordance
with the rules below 1 & 2 the height and embedment of timber stumps and posts supporting
single storey or two-storey building shall be as follows.
(a)

Their height above ground shall not exceed twelve times the width oftheir smaller
face or least diameter.

(b)

Their embedment in the foundation material shall not be less than 30 percent of
their height above ground level or 450mm whichever is the greater. Excavations
shall be only of sufficient size to allow the placement of the soleplate or bearing
pad and, in firm non-plastic soils, backfilling with excavated material which is
free from vegetable matter shall be deemed to provide effective restraint.
Cement-soil mixtures in the portions of 1:6 maybe used for back-filling in the
case of plastic soils. In all cases the backfilling shall be well rammed in layers
not exceeding 75mm in depth.

(1)

Bracing in cases where

(a)

height of stumps or posts exceeds the limits prescribed above

(b)

depth of embedment of stumps or posts prescribed in rule "t," above can not
be achieved, or

(c)

foundation soils become plastic when wet or are insufficiently cohesive to


provide lateral support.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

6t-

UTlUZA TlON OF TIMBER

(2)
Figure 4.4 illustrates recommended systems of corner bracing. Each brace should where
possible, be fixed across a minimum of three stumps or posts, but the angle ofthe brace with
the horizontal should not be less than 30 degrees or more than 60 degrees. The lower end of
all braces should finish approximately 150mm clear of the ground. The sizes for braces shall
. be as follows.
~ of brace between points of
attachment

Cross Section
Sizes

up to 2.1mm
over 2.1m and up to 3.Om
over 3.Om and up to 4.:8m

75x38mm
75x50mm
l00x50mm

(3) . Braces shall be fixed at each point of contact with a stump or post by means of a 12mm
diameter galvanized through-bolt, nut and washer.
(4)
Round stumps shall be checked out a depth of 12mm to provide bearing for braces at
points of contact.
2) Stumps and posts with height to width ratio exceeding 15. Where the height above
ground of any stump or post exceeds 15 times the width of its smaller face, the
cross-sectional dimension and systems of bracing and embedment of the stump or
post shall be-designed in accordance with established civil engineering principles.'

62

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 4: TIMBER FRAMES

.~~

~I.

I'

11

II'A~.

,II

III

"lJ;

(~~~

('v ")
'-..v ....

1'1

dl

(UJ:)

'::c...

(a) Bracing type, when embedment Is adequate but


height above ground exceeds 12 X min. race
width or stump

I"i I

.,'...... , :II
p~~.'~i.'li
I '
.".
."

1,1

III1-

.. ' l . i J '

......

:-..,

"

I
III
III'
, ij)" ....

III

li,t/

/'

....

....

.... / lj.J-."

" .
_Rock

(b) Cross bracing type where required embedment.


cannot be obtained

Figure 4.4 Two Directional Bracing at External Comers of Buildings

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

63

unuZA TlON OF TIMBER

l'able 4.2 'ootingsto Timber Building Stumps

Footing Type

Minimum
bearing area of

Stump section

Soleplate

mm.

Recommended sizes for timber soleplate

m1 :

Length

Width

thickness

mm.

mm.

mm,

450

100

75

300
250

150
200

38
50

-,

0.045

iooxioo or

110

round

"

--

125X125 or 140
round

300
250

150X150 or 160

300
225

round

200

zeoxzoo or 210

150

50

200

38

15o.

38
38

200
250

50

Timber soleplate not recommended

round

0.090

1ooXlOO or11O
round

450

200

75

125X125 or 140

380

250

75

150X150 or 160

600

150

75

round

380
300

250
300

50
75

round

2OOX2OO or 210
round

0.120

Timber sole plate not recommended

1OOX100 or 110
round 125X125
or 140 round

480

250

75

150X150 or 160
. round

600

200

75

2ooX200 or 215

Timber soleplate not recommended

round
D

0.180

Laminated or grillage type of soleplate maybe


approved

0.180

As for Footing type D For use only in area where soil


bearing pressure is known to exceed 125 kga

64

EBCS - 5 1995

Footing requires to be designed inaccordance with


engineering principle.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

"'

" " " .

--_._-----------_._~------------

CHAPTER 4: TIMBER FRAMES

Table '4.3 Maximum Stump Spacing


Maximum Stump Spacing, m along length of bearer under wall supporting

Types of
roofmg

Types of
footing

_ ,._.......

Sheet

Spacing
of bearers
parallel to
walls m.

Ridge
Strutted

1--'--"<'

1.8
2.4
3,0

1.9
1.7

3.6

Other than
under

Trusses of Span. m;
Ridge
not
Strutted

7.5

1.2
1.2
1.1
1.0

-----..-,.

load
bearing
walls

-",-,

1.4

1.6
1:5
1.3
1.2

1.4
1.4
1.2
1.2

1.3
1.3
1.2
1.1

1.8
2.4
'3.0
3.6

3.8
3.4
3.1
2.8

3.2
2.9
2.7
2.4

3.0
2,7
2.5
2.3

2,7

2,5

4,1

2.5
2.3
2.2

2.3
2.2
2.0

3.4
2.9
2.5

1.8

50
4.4
4.0
3.7

4.2
3.8
3.5
3.1

3.8
3.5
3.2
3.0

3.5

2.4
3.0
3.6

3.0
2.8

3.2
3.0
2.8
2.6

4.8
4.3
3.7
3.5

1.8
2.4
3.0
3.6

7.6
6.8
6.2
5.6

6.4
5.8
5.3
4.9

6.0
5.4
5.0
4.6

5.5
5.0
4.6
4.3

5.0
5.6
4.3
4.1

8.2
6.8
5.8
5.0

1.8
2..4
3.0
3.6

1.4
1.3
1.2

1.1

1.0
1.0
NS
NS

NS
NS
NS
NS

NS
NS
'NS
NS

NS
NS
NS
NS

1.8
2.4
3.0
3.6

2.8
2.6
2.4
2.2

2.1
2.0
1.9
1.7

1.9
1.8
1.7
1.6

1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4

1.5
1.4
1.4
1.3

4.1
3.4
2.9
2.5

1.8
2.4
3.0
3.6

3.6
3.4
3.1
2.9

2.7
2.6
2.5
2.3

2.5
2.4
2.2
2.1

2.2
2.1
2.0
1.9

2.0
1.9
1.8
1.7

4.8
4.3
3.7
3.5

1.8
2.4

5.6
5.2
4.8
4.4

4.3
4.0
3.8
3.6

3.8
3.6
3.4
3.2

3.4
3.2
' 3.1

3.0
2.9
2.8
2.6

8.2
6.8
5.8
5.0

Tiles

Rafters

3.0
3.,6

1.5

I
I

3.3

2:9.

2.0
1.7
1.4
1.2

2.0
1.7
1.4
1.2

NS = Not suitable
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

ESCS - 51995

65

Ol:ltfONt/.1S 300:1 fJN/07ms Nt//dO/H.13

[XNV'1SI .L!I3:'1 X'l'lVNOI.LN'.i.lNl 30Vd

966l 9 - S:1B::J

99

sran

IBBW1.1 :/0 NOI.J.lfZl7l.1n

.
.

...

----- -----_.

----_.-----

CHAPTER

,5

TIMBER FLOOR FRAMING AND FLOORING

5.1

APPLICATION OF SECTION

(1)
The rules of this Section shall apply to suspended structural timber floor framing and
flooring which is desigped to comply witb the requirements for dead and live loads on domestic
buildings.
_

,.:\,:. i.

-(2)
The spacing of flooring joists shall not be grater than the maximum given in Table 5.1
and 5.2 herein for the thickness type and species of structural flooring which they will be
required to support.

5.2

PROTECTION AND DURABILITY QF FLOOR TIMBERS

(1)
The detailing of wall" cladding flashings and damp coursing in any construction shall be
such that timber bearers, j6ists and flooring used for internal floor structure will be protected
from the weatlier or ground: moisture rising through the substructure. In addition, ti~\Jers used
in the structure of internal floors suspended directly over the earth in any building shall be of
the Durability Class (see Appendix K) prescribed hereunder for the applicable subfloor
conditions:
(a)

satisfactory subfloor conditions: Where ground clearance arid natural ventilation


of subfloor spaces can be arranged to achieve-the requirements, timber of any
durability class JIlY be used,

(b)

Hazardous subfloor conditions: In cases where sub floor conditions are such that
compliance with the. requirements-Involves provision of soil vapour barriers or
othersubstitutes 'for the control ofhumidity by natural air flow then timber of
durability Class 2 or better, or timbers which have been adequately treated with
preservative 'sh;all be used.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 57995

67

..'

- - - - - - - - ~

UTILIZATION OF nMBER

5.3

DRILLING AND NOTCIllNG OF MEMBERS

(1)
Any drilling or notching of members shall meet the following requirements as
appropriate.

(a)

Holes of diameter (D) not exceeding member depth 8 or 25mm which ever is the
lesser may be drilled at any point through the face of a joist or bearer, provided
such holes are spaced apart along the length of the member by a clear distance
equal to the depth of the member in which they are drilled and not more than
three such drilling occur in any 1.8m length of its span.

~(25mmmo)J,~D
<;

~q ",~(-25 mm

r~(m~

max)

Note:- Not more than 3 holes per 1.8m of span

Figure 5.1 Positioning of Holes not Exceeding Member Depth /8 or 25mm.

(b)

member depth but not exceedimg o~Omm


4
may be drilled through the face of a joist or bearer, provided such holes are
contained entirely within the central one-third of the face depth of the member or
in the case of members whose depth exceeds 200mrn, they are not closer than
their diameter from either edge. Not more than one such hole may be drilled in
any 1.8m length of member span.
H oIes 0 f diiameter (D) up to

.Q
rB
I

/~

'~6f""-~'(50mm mex)

7f-- _.
o

To

J_

.i

4 (5D rnlTl rnox )


.Q

(til D greater than 200 mm

(a) 0 less than 200 mrn

NtiYflC~ Not mort; than I hole per I' g rn

or

span.

(a) D less than :200Jtmn


(b) D greater than 200mm
Note: Not more than 1 hole per 108m of span
Figure S.2 Positioning of Holes not Exceeding Member D(~pth/4'Olr SOmm

68

E8CS ~ 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

~-

_..

_~---~--'---~~-

CHAPTER 5: TIMBER FLOOR FRAMING AND FLOORING

(c)

.Notc h"mgs or trenc himgs 0 f depth not exceed'109

member depth
or 25mm
~ 8
which ever is the lesser may be cut.in either edge of joists or bearers, provided
the length of"such' notchings does not exceed four times its depth and provided
also that where such notchings are made in opposite edges of anyone member
they shall be spaced not less than six times member depth apart along the length
'of the member,
~

Note: Notches in both surfaces atthe end of any member are not permitted

~ (25

.Q
(100
2

mm max)

mm max)

Note:- Notches in Both Surfaces at the End of Any Member are not Permited
Figure 5.3 Positioning of Notches mit Exceeding Member Depth/8 or 25mm
" WIth'10 member depth 0 f the supports at teen
h
d 0 f any
(d) At any point
2
joist or bearer such joist or bearer may be notched to a depth of
member depth ' ,
member depth , .
10 Its top surface or
~
10 Its lower surface but
3

not in both surfaces at the end of any member,

5.4

FLOOR FRAMING SUPPORTED BY MASONRY OR CONCRETE WALLING

(1)
Timber floor joists, the ends of which abut masonry or concrete walls, shall be
supported on timber wall plates (bearers) of not less than 75mm in width which are carried on
continuous corbels, offsets or attached piers built out from the walls, Where this method is not
practicable, and the height of floor is more than 1.8m above the ground, the ends of joists or
bearers may bear in pockets formed in the wall which allow at least 12mm clear air space at
sides and ends of members and provide solid bearing at least 75mm in depth.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

69

".'

-_.:...._--

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

Figure 5.4 Positioning of Notches Near Supports


5.4

FLOOR FRAMING SUPPORTED BY MASONRY OR CONCRETE WALLING

Timber floor joists, the ends of which abut masonry or concrete walls, shall be
supported on timber wall plates (bearers) of not less than 75mm in width which are carried on
continuous corbels, offsets or attached piers built out from the walls. Where this method is not
practicable, and the height of floor is more than 1.8m above the ground, the ends of joists or
bearers may bear in pockets formed in the wall which allow at least 12mm clear air space at
sides and ends of members and provide solid bearing at least 75mm in depth.
(1)

5.5

FLOOR BEARERS

5.5.1

General Requirements

Bearers, selected in accordance with the Rules mentioned above (5.3 & 5.4) shall be
installed to comply with the following requirements:

(1)

70

(a)

The bearers shall be laid in straight and normally parallel lines with their top
surfaces arranged to give level bedding for super imposed joists.

(b)

The bearers shall be spiked or bolted to their supporting stumps, posts or columns
(other .than masonry piers) in such manner as will give adequate bearing and
provide. restraint against lateral movement.

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

_. .:.~ -~~-~-----~--

CHAPTER 5:
------------,----

5.6

FLOOIUNG

5.6.1

General

TIMBER FLOOR FRAMING AND FLOORING

(1)
Flooring boards and sheet flooring materials such as plywood, when used in -tight
construction, shall be regarded as having adequate strength and -stiffness if they comply withtbe
relevant requirements.
5.6.2 Types of flooring
(1)

For the purposes of this Standard flooring is classified as


(a)

Structural
(i)
(ii)

(b)

Strip flooring
Sheet flooring.

Non Structural
(i)

(ii)

Parquetry
Mosaic parquetry

Note: For detail information on flooring refer chapter 10 of this standard


Table 5.1

Permissible Cantilevers for Bearers and Joists under Offset External


Walls and Offsets for Internal Walls

Depth of
member mm

Up to 125

-130 to 200
205 to 275
Over 280

Maximum permissible cantilever as


proportion of actual backspan,
percent

Maximum permissible offset for


internal loadbaring walles as
proportion of allowable span
percent

Sheet Roofing

Tiled Roof

Sheet Roofing

Tiled Roof

11
15
17
19

8
10
12
14

22
30
34
38

16
20
24
28

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

. ESCS - 5 1995

75

UTIUZA TlON OF TIMBER

(c)

In the lower flour of two-storey constructions, bearers shall be located directly


under any walls which support loads from upper. floors and are at tight angles to
the direction of the Joists ..

(d)

Where a load bearing wall crosses over a bearer in the supporting floor structure,
a pier, stamp or other approved support shall be provided for the bearer at the
point of such crossing.

5.5.3

Floor Joists

5.5.3.1

General requirements

(1)

72

Floor joists shall be installed to comply with the following requirements:


(a)

The joists shall be laid over bearers in straight and normally parallel.lines with
their top surfaces set accurately to a common level to receive flooring. Good
practice requires the undersides of joists having minor excesses in depth to be
notched out over bearers in order to bring them to the required common level but
packing of joists having minor deficiencies in depth may be employed for the
same purp?se provided the packing is securely fixed and is of corrosion-resistant
and incompressible material.

(b)

Joists having not more than the permitted amount of spring shall be laid so that
they tend to straighten under loading. Regardless of their length, if joists are
partially cut through over supports to correct bow or spring they shall be deemed
. to be supported at two points only.

(c)

Joints in joists, other than competently designed and executed splices which can
be shown to develop the full strength of the member within its stress grade, shall
be made only over bearers or supports. Joints-occurring in joists which parallel
and support wall plates in constructions where' fitted flsoring will be used shall
be made at points of support which provide adequate baring for both ends and
shall be butted or scarfed to maintain a straight line of joists. Intermediate joists
may be lap jointed over a bearer.

(d)

Joists shall be securely skew nailed, from both sided, to bearers at all points of
support.

EBCS - 5 7995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

-----------~-------

-~-_._---- - - -

------

----~

------

CHAPTER 5: UMBER R.OOR1i:RAMING AND FLOORING

(3)
For deep-joisted upper floors in timber-framed buildings where studs are not continuous
from ground floor to roof (platform construction), the joists 'shall bear on and be spiked to top
w~l plates of load bearing lower storey walls at points immediately above wall studs.
Where a continuous trimming joist is not provided to the ends of joists aboveexternal
wall plates~ theij ends shal~. have solid blocking or herring-bone strutting between at least the
outer pairs 'of joists- and between intermediate pairs at not more than 1.8m centres. Trimmers
or solid blocking shall be approximately 25uun less in depth than the joists. See Figure 5.5
below and solid blocking shall have a minimum thickness of 25mm.
(4)

Intermediate blocking
required between pairs
of outside joists and'
spaced CIt 1.8 m (max I
,1~W

W
1.Bm(min)

Blocking 25 mm less than 0


and centrally located
L .D :;:. 4 X .W or greater.
2. For spans over 1.' 7 m additional midspan blocking is
required (see Rule 3.8.2 (cj ),

Figure 5.5 Spacing of Strutting and Blocking for Deep-joisted Floor


Where the unsupported span of deep joists exceeds 2.7m for timbers lower than PH
grade, or exceeds 3.6mfor timbers of FlI, or higher grade, 38mm X 38mm herringbone
strutting or solid blocking shall be provided in continuous rows between joists at not more than
1.8m centres. When solid blocking is provided between deep joists the blocking should be at
least 25mm less in depth than the joist to allow unobstructed through-ventilation of the floor
(5)

cavity.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

73

UTlUZA TI-ON OF TIMBER

'

,------------------

the depth of the stud and that 50X25X600mm long cleats or battens are fixed with four 50mm
nails on both sides of the stud to bridge the sawcut. (see' Figure 6.1)

..

(2)
Any over sized, stud may be straightened by planing, provided that the stud is not
reduced below-the minimum permissible size.

II

Ii

II

s\ud~1
--lJ

:::t

'Plot.

. 50mmx 25 mmx 600 mm


long fixed with four
50 mm nails on both
sides of saw cut

~te
Figure 6.1 Straightening of Studs
6.2.1 Housing, Notching, or Drilling

6.2.1.1

llracing

Housing, notching or cutting of studs on the narrow face to accept bracing is permitted,
provided that the depth does not exceed the maximum value given in the following tables as
appropriate (see Figure 6.2).
(1)

~Top,pLate

(:
II

II

Width
(W)

10mm
max

II

t e d for knots
TD or as llml

by

" the appropriate structuraL


tim ber specification for th.e
species and stress grade
whichever is'the greater

12 Wmin

J,/

For maximum notching


see Rule 1..3.3.1
SoHom plate

Figure 6.2 Notching and Drilling of Studs

78

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 5: TIMBER FLOOR FRAMING AND FLOORING

(e)

Joint's in bearers, other than competently designed and executed splices which can
be shown to develop the full strength of the member within its stress grade, shall
be made only at points of support on which adequate bearing for both members
can be provided and the joint shall be secured by means of bolting or spiking
against displacement and separation.

(f)

Regard-less of their length, if bearers are partially cut through over supports to
correct bow or spring, they shall he deemed to be. supported at two points only.

(g)

In areas where high winds are likely to occur anchorage of bearers shall be in
accordance with Appendix L of this Standard.

5.5.2 Location of Bearers


Bearers shall be located in relation to the structure which they support in accordance
with the following requirements:
(1)

(a)

Bearers shall be provided directly under external load bearing walls which are at
right angles to the direction of the joints, except where single-storey load bearing
walls are supported on cantilevered floor joists.

(b)

In single-storey constructions, a bearer shall be placed under any load bearing


internal wall which is at right angles to the direction of the joists or within the
offset permitted.
The spacing of the two bearers which support the span of Joists on which an
internal load bearing wall is carried shall not exceed 60 percent of the maximum
permissible span for the joist size used where the load bearing wall supports a
tiled roof, or 75 percent of the maximum permissible span for the joist size used
where the loadbearing wall supports a sheet roof.

(c)

In the lower flour of two-storey constructions, bearers shall be located directly


under any walls which support loads from upper floors and are at right angles to
the direction of the Joists.

(d)

Where a load bearing wall crosses over a bearer in the supporting floor structure,
a pier, stamp or other approved support shall be provided for the bearer at the
point Of such crossing.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

71

ouvoroas 300:1

S66/. 5; - 5:193 - 9L

tJNJa1JnS Ntl'lclOIH.13

[)lNV'UI M3'1 X'1'1VNOIJ.N3.1Nl39Vd SIH.L]

-----------"---

-----or-- - - -

-----'o----..-~.

lJ31JWI.l :/0 NOU.

vmun

- - - - -- - - - , - - -

-"_ . -

----------

----

~~~_---_~

CHAPTER

TIMBER WALL FRAMING

6.1

GENERAL

6.1.1

Requirements

Wall frames, unless other wise designed, shall be set plumb, level and square, and all
mitres, butts laps and housing shall be accurately cut to give full and even bearings to their
respective framing members. Anchorage, ties, fastenings and bracing shall be adequate to
provide the strength and stiffness required for their intended use or purpose.
(1)

6.1.2 Defmitions of Effective Roof length (EL)


The effective roof length, which is a convenient indicator of the mass of roof being
carried by the outer wall members is defined in Figure. 6.1. This value of "EL" shall be used
solely.for the purpose of entering the tables for wall plates, studs, lintels, and verandah posts
given in the supplements to this standard. It shall not be used for entering tables for .rafters or
other roof members.
(1)

6.1.3 Effect of Eaves Overhang

For all cases, the member in each outer wall have been calculated on the basis of a roof
mass equivalent to one half of "EL" plus 600mm. of eaves overhang. In the case where and
eaves overhang is greater than 600mm the amount of additional overhang shall be doubled and
added to the value of "EL" used to enter the tables for wall members given in the supplements
to this Code Standard.
(1)

6.2

STUDS AND STRAIGHTENING OF STUDS

Studs to sides of openings and studs supporting concentrated loads shall not be cut or
notched except as permitted by rule. But sawcats may be made in common studs of minimum
size for the purpose of correcting spring, provided that such sawcuts do not exceed one-half of
(1)

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

77

UTILIZA TlON OF TIMBER

1.8m centres. When solid blocking is provided between deep joists the blocking should be at
least 25mm less in depth than the joist to allow unobstructed through-ventilation of the floor
cavity.

5.5.4

Opening in Floors

5.5~4.1

joints between members

Where openings are formed in joisted floors, all joints between curtailed joists,
trimmers ~d trimming joists shall be madeby half housing, mortising and tenming, suitable
metal fittings, or other means adequate to transfer the load without seriously weakening the
timbers or relying on the strength of nails into end grain.
(1)

5.5.4.2

1Wmming of openings

(1)
Trimmers which carry no loads other than normal floor loadings and are not more than
1m long shall not be of lesser section than the joists which they support. For each 0.3m:or
part thereof by which their length exceeds 1m, their width shall be increased by 20 percent but
if their length exceeds 3m they shall be the subject of design in accordance with structural
engineering principles.
(2)
Trimming joists which carry no loads other than normal floor loading shall be of the
same section as the trimmers which they support (See Figure 5.6).

Curioiled joist

Trimming jo isis

Figure 5.6 Trimming of Openings

74

EBCS - 57995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

.
- - - - - - - - - - - -

CHAPTER 6: TIMBER WALL FRAMING

6.2.1.2

Nogging, trimmers, lintels

(1)
Housing or notching to accept no~ging, trimmers, lintels and the like may be made in
the wider face of studs, provided that the depth of cut does not exceed lOmm.
t:

(2)
An exception to this rule can be-made in the case of a stud to the side of an opening
(jamb stud) which may have material equal to one-half of its depth removed over an area
sufficient to accept the head. or lintel member, provided always that such head or lintel member
continues through and is housed into the next stud adjoining the jamb stud.

6.2.1.3

Spacing

(1)
Where housings, notchings or drillings are made in the same or adjacent faces of the
same stud they shall be spaced not less than twelve times the width of the stu? apart,

6.2.1.4
(1)

Holes in the side face


In the wide face of studs, the width of any hole shall not exceed the greater of

6.2.1.5

(a)

one-quarter of the width of the face; and

(b)

the largest width of knot permitted in the appropriate structural timber


specification for the species and stress grade.

Studs at walljunctions

(1)
The arrangement of studs at wall junctions and intersections shall be in accordance with
one of the methods in Figure 6.4 and described here under:

;~

(a)

Three studs, not less in size than the common studs used in the intersecting walls,
shall be arranged as shown in Figure. 6.3 a.b,c, or d and shall be securely joined
together by means of spikes and blocking pieces.

(b)

Two studs, not less in size than the common studs used in the intersecting walls,
shall be arranged as shown in Figure. 6.3e to provide comer fixing-for internal
linings and shall be permitted for brick veneer construction.
r: ,

..
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

~~

EBCS - 51995

79

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

(a) Corner.

(b) Corner

(e) Corner

(r) Corner

(c) Corner

(9) Intersection

(d) Intersection

(h) Intersection

Figure 6.3 Studs at Wall Junctions


(c)

Two studs, not less in size than the cormnon studs used in the intersecting walls,
shall be arranged as shown in Figure. 6.3f and shall be securely spiked together.
This arrangement provides for full fixing of extemallinings only but may be used
where the Building Authority pe-rmits the use of a metal clip-fixing system for
internal linings. See Figure 6.3g.

6.3

EAVES, BEAMS AND VERANDAH PLATES

(1)
Eaves, beams or verandah plates, which provide support and fixing for rafters and

trusses over full height openings or recesses in walls or over verandahs or porches covered by

the main roof structure shall not be less than 50rmn thick, and where their span exceeds 2.1m,

their depth may not be greater than four times their thickness, unless their lower edge can be

provided with effective restraint against lateral buckling. Any reduction in nominal size through

80

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 6: TIMBER WALL FRAMING

mill dressing or shaping of such members shall be considered and allowed for when sections
are selected.

6.4

NOGGINGS

Except where some non-conventional framing system giving equivalent performance


characteristics is employed, studs in each panel of walling shall be stiffened by means of closely
fitted solid timber nogging or bridging pieces, at not more than 1,2Om centres in their height.
Closer spacings shall be employed where necessary for the support or fixing of cladding or
linings.
(1)

(2)

6.5

The noggings or bridging pieces shall meet the following requirements:


(a)

they shall be not less than 25mm in width, or 40mm in width where nail-fixed
sheet material is to be butt jointed thereon, and shall not be offset by more than
their own width from a straight line.

(b)

their depth shall be not less than the depth of the stud minus 25mm.

(c)

they shall be located centrally in the depth of the studs except where they are
required to be flush with one face of the studs in order to provide fixing or
support for cladding or lining materials.

BRACING OF STUD WALLS

6.5.1 Temporary Bracing


(1)

Where a stud wall is subjected to


(a)

racking forces during the erection of trusses.or the raising of other loads or

(b)

other loads, such as wind loads


temporary bracing additional to the bracing is required, to prevent racking of the
wall and such temporary bracing shall remain in place until the building is able
to resist wind loads.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

81

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

6.5.2 Permanent Bracing

6.5.2.1

General

(1)
Stud walls shall be stiffened against longitudinal racking or distortion by means of
diagonal bracing or structural sheeting.

6.5.2.2

Timber bracing
(a)

Timber bracing for walls containing notched studs shall be in accordance with the
following requirements:
(i) Diagonal timber bracing used in single-storey construction shall be not less
than-

(ii)

A.

15mm actual thickness where studs are not greater than lOOmm in
depth, or

B.

19mm actual thickness where studs exceed lOOmm in depth.

Diagonal timber bracing used in both upper and lower storeys of two-storey
constructions shall be not less than 19mm actual thickness.

(iii) The width of such bracing shall be not less thanA.

50mm where stud lengths are not greater than 2.7m, or

B.

75mm where stud lengths exceed 2.7m in length or the structure is in


an area or situation where high winds are likely to occur at frequent
intervals.

(iv) A minimum of one or, where the length of wall permits, two such braces in
opposing directions, one from each end of the wall, shall be provided between
top and bottom plates at an angle of approximately 45 degrees to the horizontal
in each straight length of walling and may be let in to finish flush with the
faces of plates and studs.
(v) Braces shall be free from end splits, defects (such as knots) exceeding one
third of the cross-section, sloping grain exceeding I in 12 or any checks of

82

EBCS 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

... __: ......_._----------- --

CHAPTER 6: TIMBER WALL FRAMING

I
I

such length or depth as would affect the fastening of the braces to the studs
and wall plates.

6.5.3

Structural Plywood Bracing


(a)

structural plywood bracing for external walls of single-storey and two-storey


timber frame constructions shall comply with its appropriate thickness as given
below.

Table 6.1

Structural Plywood Wall


Bracing Minimwn Thickness

Stud Spacing
mrn
450mrn
600mrn
Note:

Minimum Plywood
thickness, mrn

8
10

4
6

A = pinus structural plywood


B = Plywood for marine craft

(i) The plywood shall be fixed to the external wall frames of each storey in

accordance with the following requirements.


(A) For stud heights upto 2.7m, plywood shall be fixed to either face of the
wall plates and studs and the minimum total width of bracing for any total
length of straight wall shall be 1.8m. This may be made up of one sheet
1.8m wide or two sheets, each O.9m wide which will usually be fastened
in the corners.
(B)

Narrow wall widths, down to 30Omrn, alongside openings may be braced


with plywood, and where possible the plywood shall be made continuous
over two stud spacings above or below the opening.

ii) Fixings used to secure plywood bracing shall conform to the following

requirements, as appropriate.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

83

UTlUZA TION qF TIN!BER

(A) Nails or Clouts. Hand-driven Of power-driven flathead, galvanized


or coated nails or clouts of minimum size 31mm long by 2.85mm
diameter, shall be spaced at 150inm centres around all edges of the
sheet, not less than 9mm from the sheet edges, and at 300mm centres
along inter-mediate studs, where they occur.
(8)

Staples. Power- driven structural galvanized or coated staples shall


be spaced at l00mm centres around all edges of the sheet, not less
than 9mm from the sheet edges, and at 200mm centres along
intermediate studs, where they occur. The staples shall be used to
their manufacturers' recommendations to provide equivalent fixing.

(iii) Wall studs shall be placed behind the edges of plywood sheets.

(iv) Where. . horizontal butt joints


occur between plywood sheets, a row of
.
Dogging shall be provided to support the joints. Nails or staples shall be
spaced along each edge of butt joint.
(b)

Structural plywood bracing for internal walls of single storey and two-storey
timber frame constructions shall
(i)

(ii)

(c)

comply with the requirement of (a) above


be applied to two straight internal walls, evenly distributed throughout the
building and generally parallel to its width. Each wall shall be braced with
a total width of not less than 1.8m of plywood.

Plywood bracing for brick veneer construction shall have


(i)

(ii)

a clearance of not less than 25mm provided between the brick veneer and
the face of the plywood sheets.
the brickwork tied to the plywood bracing by galvanized right-angled metal
wall framing ties.

6.5.4 Non-Load Bearing Internal Walls


(1)
For the purposes of this Standard, a non load bearing internal wall is one that supports
neither roof nor floor loads but may support ceiling loads.
(2)
Non-load bearing internal walls or partitions of any form may be erected, provided that
their performance is suitable for their intended purpose.

84

EBCS - 5 7995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 6: TIMBER WAU FRAMING

(3)
In conventional timber-framed construction for non-load bearing internal walls up to
2.7m high, with or without openings, wall members of all timber species of F4 stress grade and
higher may be used as follows.
(a)

Top and bottom wall plates trenched or un trenched, shall be not less than
70mmX4Omm.

(b)

Common wall studs, notched or un notched, shall be not less than 70mmX4Omm
spaced up to 600mm.

(c)

Studs supporting lintels shall be of the same size as common wall studs.

(d)

Noggings shall comply with section 6.4, with minimum nogging size of
50mmX25mm.

(e)

Wall bracing shall conform to one of the methods on timber bracing and
structural plywood bracing.

(f)

The size of lintels to openings in nonload bearing internal walls supporting ceiling
joists only, shall be as for hanging beams.

(g)

The size of lintels to openings in non loadbearing internal walls supporting


hanging beams shall be as given in Table 6.2.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

85

.
..

---_ ... _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER


~\t.,t

Table 6.2 Lintels for Internal Openings Supporting Hanging Beams


(Maximum Ceiling Joist Span 2.4m)

Maximum allowable Span of Lintel,M

Unseasoned timber

Seamed Softwood

Stress Grade

Stress Grade

125X38
150X38
175X38
200X38
225X38
250X38
300X38
Toleranceon
cross-section

86

size
mm

Size mm

Size mm

100X3~

Seamed hardwood

F4

F7

FH

. 1.2
1.6
2;0
2.3
2.6
3.0
3.1
3.2

1.4
1.8
2.1
2.5
2.9
3.2
3.6
4.0

1.6
2.0
2.4
2.8
3.1
3.5
3.9
4.7

90X35
120X35
140X35
170X35
190X35
240X35

-4nun

-4nun

-3nun

Toleranceon
Cross-section

F4

F5

F8

1.0
1.6
2.0
2.6
2.9
3.2

1.2
1.9
2.3
2.8
3.1
3.7

1.6
2.1
2.5
3.0
3:~j.

4.2

No negative tolerance

63X30
85X30
108X30
130X30
160X30
21OX30
235X30
Tolerance on
Cross-seclion

Stress
Grade

Fl
4

F17

1.1
1.6
2.0
2.4
3.0
3.9
4.3

1.2
1.7
2.1
2.5
3.1
4.0
4.5

No negalive
tolerance

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995
'J

... ,

l.

----

CHAPTER :',

TIMBER ROOF FRAMING

7.1

APPLICATION OF SECTION

(I)The rules in this section shall apply to light timber-framed roof construction comprising
members which are intended to support only their own dead weight and the dead weight of the
roof covering, plus loads or combinations of loads incident to wind pressures and to occasional
construction or maintenance work.
Note:- The type of roof construction described in their section, and for which the tables of
spans of members are calculated, may not be adequate in fixings or size of members to resist
wind forces in cased where the height of wall plots, or other support to which the roof is affixed
is in excess of 15m above average surrounding ground level. In such cases, or in areas where
cyclones or high winds are known to occur, the additional ties and restraints given in Appendix
L are the recommended and tabulated member sizes should be verified to the satisfaction of
Building Authority.

7.2

CEILING JOISTS

7.2.1 General
(1)
The maximum allowable spans for the various sizes and stress grades of timber when
used as ceiling joist may be considered suitable for Ceiling linings of mass not more than
20kg/m 2
(2)
This would include fibrous plaster up to 19mm t,hick, gypsum board up to 25mm thick,
hard board up to 19min thick, low density fibre insulating board up to lOOmm thick, pressed
metal (Steel) up to 2.Omm thick, plywood up to 12mm thick and medium density solid timber
up to 32mm thick.
...;;.
r~

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

87

UTlUZA TION OF TIMBER .

.7.2.2 Spacing and Direction


(1)
Joists shall be in single lengths where possible and, in the case of coupled roofs, shall
be similar in spacing and direction to the main roof rafters so that they may be fixed to and act
as ties between the feet of pairs of opposing rafters.

7.2.3 Splicing
(1)
In cases where-splices in joists are unavoidable they shall be made only at points of
support. Such splices shall be made with 25mm thick timber fishplates on both sides of butt
joints or the joists shall be lapped for a distance equivalent to at least three times their depth.
Lapped splices and both ends of butted and fishplated splices shall be secured with six clenched
through-spikes of not less than 4.00mm or with a 12mm diameter bolt.

7.2.4 Support
(l)End bearings of joists shall be the full width of any wall plate on which they are
supported. At points of intermediate support from above, such as at hanging beams, each joist
shall be secured against vertical deflection -by adequate means such as 40nunx4Omm timber
cleats, strappingof25mmxL6mm galvanized steel, or 12Smmx6.30mm low carbonsteel ceiling
dogs, all arranged as specified in Section 7.3
7.2.5 Opemng in Ceilings

(1)
Where it is required to provide an opening in joisted ceiling constructions for the
purpose of access to the roof space, clearance for a chimney, or any other reason such opening
shall be trimmed all around to provide full support for ceiling linings.
(2)

Trimming of joists shall meet the following requirements:


(a)

All joints between curtailed joists and trimmers, or between trimmers and
trimming joists, shall be made in an approved manner which will not reduce the
required load carrying capacity of either member and will not require the loading
to be carried by nails driven in to end grain of timber..

(b)

Trimmers which carry only normal ceiling loads and do not exceed 1.2m in
length shall not be less in either dimension than the joists which they support.
For each 300mm or part thereof by which their length exceeds 1.2m, their width

88 EIICS 6'''6

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODe STANDARD

- - - - - ---------

CHAPTER 7: TIMBER ROOF FRAMING

shall be increased bX 20 percent, but if their length exceeds 3.0m they shall be
. the subject design.

of

(c)

Trimming joists which carry no loads other than normal ceiling loadings shall be
of the same section as the trimmers which they support.

7.a.6 CeiUnB Battens


(1)
Where ceiling battens are used, the sizes shall be adequate to accommodate the mass of
the ceiling material, the size of clout or other fastener required to tie the ceiling to the batten,
and the need for adequate stiffness in the batten to ensure a flat finish to the ceiling.

7.3

HANGING BEAMS

(1)
The spacing of hanging beams used to provide intermediate support to ceiling joists shall
be determined by the permissible span of the joists which they support.

(2)

Hanging beams shall-meet the following requirements:


(a)

End bearings of hanging beams shall be the full width of any wall plate on which
they are supported and they shall be landed wither directly above a stud or their
load shall be adequately distributed to studs by intermediate blocking or by local
reinforcement of the wall plate.

(b)

The fixings used to connect ceiling joists to hanging beams shall be arranged to
be on opposite sides of the hanging beam at each adjacent joist connection.and
hanging beams shall be held in a vertical position at both ends by nailing or
bolting to an adjoining hip-end rafter or gable-end stud or by means of angled
strutting from internal walls.

(c)

Where the slope of rafters is such that the depth of hanging beams must be
reduced by more than two-thirds in order to avoid interference with roof cladings
above points of support on external top wall plates, than special provision shall
be made for additional support.

(2)
Hanging beams may be angled or placed off-centre by an amount sufficient to enable
them to meet any of the foregoing conditions.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

89

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

7.4

RIDGE BOARDS

7.4.1 Unstrutted Ridge Boards


(1)
Where ridge boards are not strutted and where apposingpairs of rafters are not separated
by more than their own thickness at either side of their ridge junction, the ridge boards used
in coupled roofs shall be of sufficient depth to give full bearing to upper ends of rafters and
shall be not less than 25mm in thickness.

7.4.2 Strutted Ridge Boards


(1)
Where a ridge board is strutted at any point along its length, such as at junctions with
unsupported lengths of hip or valley rafters exceeding 5m span, then additional struts shall he
evenly spaced at not greater than 203m intervals along its length. The size (section) of ridge
board used shall be not less than 50mm greater in depth than the depth of the rafters which it
supports and 40mm in thickness except that where ridges are strutted, as above, at not mo~e
than 1.8m centres, the ridge board may be 25mm in thickness.

Rafhl"

Hanver fixed 10 raft.r

Ipr. "rabl y bol led I and


secured 10 trimmer loist
by meon s 01 I imb.r cleot
or hoop iron slrop
./

Figure 7.1A Method for End Support to Hanging or Strutting

Beams under Low-pitch Rafters

7.4.3 Splicing of Ridge Boards


(1)

Where splicing of ridge boards can not be avoided, the joint shall be
(a)

90

close butted and secured with full depth fish plates of 25mm timber on either side,
or

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

-------:..-'-------------_. -

CHAPTER 7: TIMBER ROOF FRAMING

(b)

7.S

scarf jointed at the abutment of a rafter pair.

UNDER PURLINS

(1)
Where under purlins are used to provide intermediate support to, rafters they shall meet
the following requirements:
(a)

The under purlins shall be in single lengths where possible and in straight runs
at right angles to the direction of rafters.

(b)

The spacing of under purlins shall not exceed the ailowable span for size and
stress grade.of.the rafters which they support, and they shall be located at or near
the mid-length of such rafters or if two or more rows of under purlins are
required they shall be suitably spaced between ride and eaves.

(c)

Where under purlins must be joined (spliced) in their length, the joints shall be
halved, lapped and spiked together and shall be made over a point of support.

(d)

The ends of an under purlin shall not project (cantilever) beyond a support by
more than 25 % of the span distance for which it was selected, except as provided
in (e) below.

(e)

Under purlins which meet at a hip rafter or valley and are. securely fastened
thereto shall be considered as supporte~ by the hip or valley rafter.

7.6

COMMON RAFTERS

7.6.1

Span

(1)
The maximum allowable spans of rafters used in coupled roof construction shall be as
appropriate to their size, spacing, eaves projection system of roof cladding (see Section 7.6.3)
and to the stress grade of timber to be used.

7.6.2

Lateral Restraint

(1)
Depending on the span, loading and ends fixing, any rafter with a depth to breadth ratio
exceeding 1:1 may deflect laterally. Careful attention to the fixing of rafters to their supports
and to adjacent members such as ceiling joists will, in most cases, be adequate to prevent lateral

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

91

IJTIUZA nON OF 77MBER

tilting or twisting, but in certain cases where narrow sections are used over long spans it will
be necessary to provide additional restraint.

In conventional roof construction the restraint provided by the purlins in the case of
(2)
sheet roofing. or by battens for tiled roofing, together with the required wind bracing (see
Section7.9)is sufficient to stabilize the more common sizes of rafters against lateral movement.
It is essential to ensure that the purlins or battens and the bracing are adequately fastened
(3)
to the rafters to take advantage of this restraining effect.
(4)
For relatively deep rafters, such as, those having a depth to breadth ratio of 5:1 or
greater, extra precautions such as solid blocking or herring bone strutting between members o~.
other suitable precautions shall be taken to prevent rafters twisting or moving laterally. Where
solid blocking or herring-bone strutting is used it shall be fitted at equally spaced intervals not
exceeding 1.5m.
(5)

Other types of construction providing effective restraint include.


(a)

Use of timber decking or planking (see Table 7.4 herein laid diagonally or at right
angles te-rafters and nailed to rafters at each crossing;

(b)

use of plywood (see Table 10 herein) or hardboard sheeting over the rafters and
secured to rafters with nails at not m~re than 450mm. centres; or with staples
38mmx12mm throat and 2mm centres intermediate, and 300mm centres at sheet
ends, with the staples in each sheet end staggered.

7.6.3 Roofing Material Groups


Table 6.1, Structural Plywood Wall Bracing Minimum Thickness, herein shall be used
to establish the general classification for the intended roofing materials where this is required
for application of any of the various tables of permissible spans for structural members.
(1)

7.7

ROOF STRUTflNG

7.7.1

General

The size, direction and fixings of all struts or strutting beams used for stiffening or
support of roof members shall be such that the loads from such struts or beams are taken to the
building foundations by the most direct route possible without causing lateral movement or
(1)

92

ESCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 1: .TIMBER ROOF FRAMING

vertical deflections which will result in distortion of the building frame or cracking of wall
ceiling linings.

and

7.7.2 Roof Struts


(1)
Unless special provisions are made for restraints, roof struts shall meet the following:
requirements.
(a) , Single struts shall be at an angle not exceeding 30 degrees to the vertical, in any
direction. Where the strut angle to the vertical exceeds 30 degrees but does not
exceed 45 degrees, the strut shall be opposed by another strut at the same angle
(see Figure 7.2).
(b)

They shall be birds mouthed or halved to purlins as show in Figure. 1.3 and
shall be supported only on poadbearing walls or adequate strutting beams.

(c)

The size of struts shall be

0) for sheet roofs


A.
B.
: I

(ii)

struts up to 105m long in all stress grades-100mmX50mm or 75X75mm;


struts up to 2.4m long in all stress grade-75X75mm;

For tiled roofs

A.

B.
C.
D.

struts up to 1.5m long in F8 and higher stress grades-100mmX50mm or


75mmX75mm.
struts up to 204m long in F8 and higher stress grades-75mmX75mm.
struts up to 105m long in less than F8 stress grade-75nunX75mm.
struts up to 204m long in less than F8 stress grade-100mX75..

(d)

Where supported by stud walling, struts shall land either directly above a stud of
adequate section or their load shall be adequately distributed to two or more studs
by intermediate blocking or by localreinforcement of the top wall plate on which
they bear.

(e)

Landing or supporting roof struts over openings shall be avoided but where no
alternative can be found then the lintel above such opening shall be deemed to be
a strutting beam.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

93

UTlLl~ TlON

OF TIMBER

Underpurlin

Spr"a~er

'00 mm

cleat

x 38 mm

at each side of struts

Equal angles not


exceeding '5
- -...

1 onLy boll 12 mm
through both spreader
cleats and strut
Top.wall plate

Top wall
pLate

DETAIL A

DETAIL B

Figure 7.2 Fan or Flying Struts for Maximum EI up to 4.Sm and Spacing

Between Struts up to 3.0m

7.7.3 Strutting Beams


(1)

Strutting beams shall meet the following requirements.


(a)

Strutting beams may extend in any direction in the roof space so long as their
ends are supported on load bearing walls.

(b)

Where supported by stud walling, either the beam shall land directly above, a stud
of adequate section, or their load shall be adequately distributed over two or more
studs by means of intermediate blocking or by local reinforcement of the wall top
plate on which they bear.

(c)

Blocking between strutting beams and wall plates shall provide for an initial
clearance of 25mm at mid-span between the underside of the beams and
(i)
(ii)

94

the tops of the ceiling joists which they cross over, or


the ceiling, where they are parallel to the ceiling joists.

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

~~

--

~~~----~~~----~~----~~~~~

CHAPTER 7: TIMBER ROOF FRAMING

Strutting beams should not be used for the support of the ceiling structure where
alternative support is available.
(d)

Where the slope of a roof is so low that it becomes impossible to arrant strutting
beams and ceiling hanging beams so that they do not intersect, then the size of the
strutting beam shall be given special consideration to ensure that undue deflection
does not occur under the additional load imposed by the hanging beam (see
Figure 7.4)

(e)

Landing of strutting beams over opening shall be avoided but where no alternative
can be found then the lintel above such opening shall also be deemed to be a
strutting beam.

(t)

The cases where strutting beams must be supported on plates from which rafters
are pitched, their ends, may be chamfered to avoid interference with roof
claddings, but if more than one-half of the depth of the beam must be cut away
for this purpose then an approved alternative end support shall be provided.

Note: For strutting beams it is desirable to use seasoned timber or built-up sections such as
box-beams manufactured from seasoned timber in order to minimize deflections in the
roof structure resulting from shrinkage.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

9S

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

Not Ie ss than 25 mm
and not OYer 38 mm
mp.asured at boHom
of underpurlin

-.Az.

Rafter

,/,

~--

.:::'

'

Top of sfrut must


reach at least to
top edge of
underpu rt in

~~ I

'2z;A\J {j)-o- Underpurlin

DETAIL FOR PERPENDICULAR STRUTTING

\ernotive 'positions for other


nail s, if these are driven
AI

(Appllcnble for slruttlnll npprox:


or IrulV perpondiculor 10 rofters)

(a) Fixing of untlerpurllns to rafters

""'nails
0 7Srnm'--":..,

DETAILS FOR VERTICAL ('PLUMD') STRUTTING;

(ApplicAblo for strutting upprox. Of


trulv Yertlcal)

(b) Fixing of struts to underpurllns

Strut or fan struts set perpendicular


to raof slope
'
Not less thon .three nOlls
ot leost twice -length of
chock lhicknes s
---Chock

Firm bose for noiling


(c) FIXing of struts at supports

Figure 7.3 Roof Strut and Underpurlin Fixing

96 .EBCS- 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 7: TIMBER ROOF FRAMING

TILt to strutting beam


achieved by bLocking
piece
StruHing beam

-...... <,

-------------t-----------~

'wall"7'
plate .

'T"

25 mm ~learance.

Wall
pl:a'te,.

at mid-span

. Ceiling joists

Figure 7.4 A Method of Fixing Strutting Beams to Achieve Full End Support
Under Low Pitched Roofs and Clearance Above Ceilings
7.8

COLLAR TIES

7.8.1 Fitting
(1)
In the framing of a roof, the slope of which is greater than 1:3(18 degrees) and in which
the rafter span is such as to require support from under purlins, collars ties shall be fitted to
each alternate pair of rafters at a point immediately above the under purlins. In roofs of similar
slope where under purlins are not required, the collar ties shall be fitted to each alternate pair
of rafters at a point not greater in height above top plate level than two thirds of the rise of the
roof.

7.8.2 Sizes
(1)

Collar ties shall beof the following sizes:


(a)

Ties up to 4.2m long


(i)
(ii)

(b)

F8 or higher stress grade-75mmX40mm;


lessthan F8 stress grade-75mmX50mm or lOOX40mm.

Ties longer than 4.2m


(i)
F8 or higher stress grade lOOinmx40mm.
(ii)
less than F8 stress grade-lOOX50mm or 125X40mm.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

97

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

Table 7.1

T & G (including finger jointed) Boards for not


Non-Trafficable Roofs Minimum Allowable Thicknesses
Minimum Thickness of Boards', mm

Ethiopian .

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

7.9

Spacing of Rafters, mm

Visual. Grade

Standard.

Standard
Select
Standard
Select
Standard
Select
one grade

"

"

Standard & select


"
"

450

600

900

1200

1500

1800

11

13
12
13
12
13
12
15
15
15
14

19
17
19
17

24
22
24
22
23
22
26
27
26
25

29
26
29
26
28
26
32
32
32
30

34
31
34
31
32
31
37
38
37
35

10
11
10
10
10
12
12
12
11

18
17
21
21
21
20

WIND BRACING

~(1)

Roofs, such as simple gabled roofs, the ridges to which are not secured by means of
hips or valleys against longitudinal movement arising from wind or other forces, shall be braced
.in one of the following manners:
(a)

Not less than two braces shall be interposed between the ridge and a load bearing
wall.
These braces shall be set in opposing directions at a slope of approximately 45
degrees to the horizontal and shall be shouldered to the ridge board and fixed to
the wall in one of the manners specified for purlin struts in Rule 7:7 such braces
shall be of the following dimensions:
(i)
(ii)

(b)

98

Lengths up to 2.1m-75mmx50mm.
Lengths over 2.1m and up to 4.2m - l00mmx50mm or 75x75mm.

Diagonal bracing shall be run at an angle of approximately 45 degrees from ridge


to wall plate in the plane of the roof slope and shall be nailed at each intersection
with a rafter. Such bracing shall be 75mm + 25mm timber and shall not be let
into the rafters.

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER

TIMBER DOORS, WINDOWS INCLUDING


FRAMES AND LININGS

8.1

MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

(1)

Timber should be thoroughly seasoned to the moisture content appropriate to the work.

8.1.1 Timber Sizes aild Weights


The actual sizes of unwrought timber will vary from the nominal, the amount of
variation differing according to the species and the country of origin.
(1)

(2)
The reduction in size that should be allowed for surfacing is given in the Standard
Method of Measurement of Building Work in BSCP 151 :PartI: 1957 as 2.38mm for each

wrought face.
(3)
Variation in moisture content will affect size, as an example of the extent of this
variation across the grain, drying from 25 % to 12 % moisture content may cause shrinkage in

this direction of as much as 104mm per m in extreme cases. No appreciable change in length
generally occurs.
The weight of timber varies according to the species and its moisture content; the
weights of individual pieces of the same species may be expected to differ, in some cases
substantially, from the average weight usually given in works of reference. Variation in weight
due to moisture is small in seasoned timber and for practical purposes may be disregarded.
(4)

8.2

DESIGN

8.2.1

Function

The primary function of a door is to provide a movable barrier to an opening. Many


types have been developed to meet the requirements of differing circumstances; various methods
of opening have also been developed and there is a wide choice of fastenings and other
accessories.
(1)

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

99

..

...

-------~--_._----

.
-----

------------

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

8.2.2 Weather Protection

8.2.2.1

Exclusion of rain

Doors and frames


(1)
External doors and their frames may need special provision for the exclusion of rain,
specially those doors that open directly into habitable rooms in dwellings and other buildings
and in buildings on exposed sites. A desirable precaution, even in sheltered conditions of
exposure", is to provide a check throat in the rebate of the frame.
(2)
The throat should be located in the internal angle of the rebate and its position (i.e.
where in the side of or bottom of the rebate) should be such that any water it conveys to the sill
can drain away to the outside.
(3)
The bottom of a door is particularly vulnerable to driving rain. A certain amount of
protection against its entry can be given by a weather board on the outer face at the bottom of
the door.It should project well beyond the face of the door and should be weather off, to throw
water clear of the gap under the door; it should preferably extend the full width of the door,
the frame being scribed over it; and, wherever practicable, its upper edge should be tongued
into the bottom rail of the door. Out-ward opening doors, unless the frame is set well back
from the outer face of the wall or is other wise protected, by a projecting hood for example,
should be provided with a projecting weather fillet along the head of the frame. It should be
weathered off on its top edge threaded on its underside and tongued into the frame.
(4)
The edges of the meeting stiles of doors hung in pairs, or folding, should wherever
possible be rebated together and check- threaded. Inter locking joints should be avoided, for,
however well they may fit when made, swelling of the wood or the addition of successive coats
of paint will make them jam and prevent the doors closing. If more protection is required than
a. single rebate will give, the stiles, if thick enough, may be double rebated, or a small cover
fillet may be planted on one or both sides.

(5)
Swing doors cannot close into a rebate and cannot be made weather-tight; an external
door, therefore, should only be hung in this way when the need for a swing door out-weighs
this disadvantage.

"Exposure conditions are classified in several codes as "sheltered", "Moderate" and


"severe" .

100

EBCS 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 8: TIMBER DOORS, WINDOWS INCLUDING FRAMES AND LININGS

Around the opening in the wall


(1)
Care is needed in design to exclude rain at the junction of a door frame with the
structure in which the opening occurs,

8.2.2.2

Draught exclusion

(1)
Gaps betweenexternal doors and their frames are the main source oJ draughts.
Precautions that should be takenzo avoid these include careful fitting of the door 'into the rebates
in the frame, rebating the edg,J's of the meeting stiles in doors hung in pairs or folding, and care
in fitting them together. Additional r-rotection can be given by the use of draught-stripping
around all edges of the door.
(2)
Rubber or felt is sometimes used for the purpose, but neither will remain effective for
long and their use. is not recommended as a permanent measure. Several proprietary systems
are available which use a resilient metal strip (usually bronze) and one of these is to be
preferred.

8.2.3 Durability
(1)
Timber may suffer ~eterioration as a result of insect or fungal attack. Fungi can develop
only under conditions where the moisture content of thetimber exceeds 20 %. Painting or the
brush application of preservative as an alternative finish.generally gives sufficient protection if
it is adequately maintained; but in certain conditions, such:' for example, as might exist on a
very exposed site or with timber containing much sapwoedva more effective preservative
treatment, preferably by impregnation, might be advisable for external door frames and sills.
(2)
Conditions favourable to decay may also occur where moisture can rise up through the
floor or is likely to lie, and then precautions should be taken to protect the timber against the.
moisture. With a door the simplest precaution is to deep, its bottom edge clear of the floor or
threshold. A weather board on an external.door will assist in throwing rain water clear of the
bottom of the door. More elaborate precautions are usually necessary with frames; they may
take the form of a damp proof course underneath the frame, or the frame may rest on an
'impervious block above the level of the floor or be set in a cast-iron shoe.
" (3)

The backs offrames, pallet pieces (unless of a timber having sufficientnatural durability
{or' the conditions to which they will be subjected) and other parts of timbers that will be
inaccessible for maintenance should be protected against moisture, particular attention being

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

10'

- - - - - --~---- - - ~ - -

---

II

U7JUZA TlON OF TIMBER


paid to end, grain. ' In normal conditions one, or preferably two, coats of a suitable primer is '
sufficient for Ute protection of'hidden-parts of joinery.

-8.2.4 "Economy
-(1)
,Where economy is of ~reat importance the designer is recommended to choose doors
from -the range of sizes in which they are mass-produced. Where this is not possible or
-'

desirable, economy may be effected by using simple designs and by limiting the number of
different types and sizes used in a building scheme.

,.2.5 Doors: ,Methods of Opening


(1)
A controlling factor 'in the choice ofmethod of opening is the space available for the
door to open and for access to or from the doorway. It is important to ensure that adjacent
doors and any' projections from them will not foul one another in opening.
(2)

The methods of opening are as follows:


(a)

SIDE-HUNG (Figure.8.1):- This is the manner of opening most generally


adopted. Doors may be hung singly or in pairs and can be fitted with single
action springs for closi~ them. When hung in pairs the meeting.stiles may be
rebated together, but this should not be done if the doors are to be fitted with
springs, because it is not possible to ensure
leaf will close first.
. that a particular
,

,
,.(~)

-.

,.?!

SINOlE,.DOOR..
II ......' "
_.. u

, , ;\f
(b) PAIIl.OF,.oOOI2..S
-.IL.~."

<, IL.

Figure 8.1 Side-hung doors'


(b) - SWING Doors (Figure 8.2) may be hung singly or inpairs and can be fitted with

double-action springs for closing. The meeting stiles of swing doors hung in
pairs should never be rebated together. Swing doors should always have vision
panels.

102

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 8: nMBER DOORS, WINDOWS INCLUDING FRAMES AND LININGS

...... t........

.:

II

... ..,........

....

"\

:.~. ,H

SINGl~,'6002.
~.U.

__..- .

.......r:

"\,
\ I

I:

.:

~
...!\>i',

,I'~"

-,,

I'
"

'i.r;J
~

(a)

::

-,

I,
It

I,

,",

,I
,I
::

P
,,~
'
"",~.

(b)J~~~, 6F<e~~~s

Figure 8.2 Swing Doors


(c)

FOLDING Doors (Figure 8.3). The space necessary for each leaf to fold when
opening is comparable to that of ordinary side-hung doors. There is a danger that
the transmission of weight from leaf to leaf may impose excessive loads on some
leaves and on the hinges.

=~==_

/~s~:~~~"'''''''''''''\
' ,'. .
\:/'~""""~~~:2:~"'"

Z;'ff\,"i:..~:-.~,::;\I~:.~
"'-:~'" ~\:
\.." ,
. . . . . .1'{

............. __ ~,"'r

'~::fi::;::~~~

.'f'

..

\!, ,::';'~

~:::','

....,
......... __ ..~,11'.,

Figure 8.3 Folding Doors


(d)

REVOLVING Doors (Figure 8.4) In designing these doors the following points
should be considered:

(3)
The number of compartments should be related to the diameter of the enclosure and to
the passage-space required. The two compartment door, which gives the maximum
space in
.
relation to the size of the enclosure, is often an advantage when a passage-way for luggage is
required.
,

(4)
Where necessary, the leaves should be capable of being readily packed together either
in the centre or at one or both sides to provide a straight-through passage-way. The doors
should be glazed.
(5)
Revolving doors may constitute a danger in the event of panic in buildings where large
numbers of people congregate. Their use is looked upon with disfavour by many Authorities,
unless alternative means of exit are adjacent to them-Revolving doors can be provided with a
panic release device.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

103

UTlLlZA TION OF TIMBER

(e)

SLIDING DOORS (see Figure 8.5):- The sliding method may be used where the
floor space needed for the opening of a side-hung door is not available, or for
large and heavy doors that would tend to drop or sag if side-hung. The different
ways in which doors may slide are as follows:
(i)

(ii)

Horizontally, straight (Figure 8.5a), operating in a plane parallel to the


opening. They may be of any type and size, in any number of leaves and
may slide on either side of the wall or partition or in a cavity within its
thickness.
Horizontally, along a flank wall (Figure 8.Sb), forming, when open, an
angle with the plane of the opening. The width of the individual leaves,
especially the end one, depends on the space available for opening. With
the method of opening as shown in the Figurer, it is necessary for the
curve to commence clear of the edge of the door when shut and a space of
at least half the width of the door leaf is needed for the curved portion of
the track and guide. If this space is not available, the end leaf should be
independent of the track and should be hung to the second leaf; the track
can then begin to curve any where between the jamb of the opening and
the second leaf. This will alow the flunk
wall or obstruction to be in line with the jamb, if necessary. The end leaf
can then act as a small door independent of the main door, but floor space
is necessary to allow it to open; it may be narrower than the other leaves
of the door.

Ca) FOUl.- .
COMPAltTM ENT

Cb) THR..EECOMPA,ltTMEblT

(e) TWQ-

COMPAlTMEt-./T

Figure 8.4 Revolving Doors


(iii) Vertically, a method. of opening normally adopted only where there is

insufficient space for either rotating or sliding horizontally.

104

EBCS

61996

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 8: TIMBER DOORS, WINDOWS INCLUDING FRAMES AND LININGS

(f)

SLIDING-AND-FOLDING Doors (Figure 8.6). The sliding-and-folding method


of opening is suitable for high and heavy doors and for wide openings where a
large number of leaves have to be accommodated.

LLeavlIs when e1osed~

. ~:~--------'----b
@g~'$:~'J
81
~.

c. __..... Q~:::------.I':==:::.:='~

ri,1~~~,j

Single leaf'

.\

C~~~~

Two-lear

__ :~~:::::=~~~-:los:~?Y::~---,-,~._
:.;,;~"""':o.-="""'
_
~

\.--------=-------~

...

Four-leaf
(';I)

:~

Sn.AIOHT

/T,.Qck

: ('r-Doe,
,);"......

~~.~~....

(b) ALONG A FLANK WAll

,. beginning to opel"l------l
I

, ~,\. :-~:::::::=:===,~:=;:j:~::==1
lly milking ~he end leaf swing free this pl"Ojel!lII6n
can be .-educed, 0/" dispensed with; in ~he '
. l:attel"case Ii post is mcessary fot" t'he doot" to
close against

Figure 8.5 Sliding Doors

(6)
The door may operate to one or both sides of the opening and the end leaf may form
an ordinary side-hung-door when the rest of the door is closed. The leaves are hinged together
and each leaf should preferably be suspended from the track on a single pivoting hanger, so that
as the door slides open each leaf folds against the next.
(7)
Figure 8.6a shows the leaves folding on the centre of the wall and projecting on both
sides; this method is preferable from a structural point of view as the weight of each leaf is
balanced on the track. By hanging in the manner shown in Figure 8.6b an unobstructed space
is obtained on one side of the wall.
8.2.6 Types of Doors

(1)
Door types are differentiated according to their construction and may be grouped under
three main heads, as follows:

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

105

~~

..

_~

__

__

~~~~--e:

- ~ ~ ~ ~----~---~---

~_

UTIUZA TION OF TIMBER

-Jf-.;~~~-:~:.!.~~~~._._-----

S"'N'~~--,~~-",,---.6.L~~~~
---.
.
....

'-";

~~---~--.,

~------_

P:ar~ly 01>""

I~ :':_:~~:~;~::_:_
Fully open

Figure 8.6 Sliding and Folding Doors


(a)

Group 1 Unframed Doors: For the purpose of this Standard, this group
comprises doors constructed without using the principle of framing and is
restricted to boarded doors of the following types:
(i)

(ii)

(b)

Ledged (Figure 8.7a) constructed of boarding secured by two or more


horizontal ledges on one side of the door. This type has several
disadvantages, the principal one being the tendency of the door to drop or
sag.
Ledged and braced (Figure 8.7b) similar in all other respects to a ledged
door, with the addition of diagonal braces acting as struts, to counteract the
tendency to drop or sag. Some types of flush doors are in fact unframed
but they are, never the less, placed in Group 3.

Group 2 . Pramed doors: For the purpose of this standard this group comprise
doors having a frame work of stiles and rails with, in some cases, other members,
and filled in a variety of ways.
(i)

106 EBCS - 5

Framed and ledged (Figure 8.7c): Consists of a framework of stiles, top


rail and bottom ledge, with intermediate ledges where required to give
support to the boarding, filled in with boarding passing over the ledges.
It combines the advantage of framed construction in resisting warping, with

1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 8: TIMBER DOORS, WINDOWS INCLUDING FRAMES AND LININGS

the resistance of solid timber to weather and rough usage, but there is a
tendency for the 100r to drop or sag owing to the lack of diagonal. braces.
(ii) Framed, ledged and braced (Figure 8.7d): Similar to framed and~ boarded
doors but with the addition to diagonal braces, within the thickness of the
framing, acting as struts to prevent dropping or sagging. This construction
is suitable where resistance to hard wear is required.
(iii) Panelled (Figure. 8.7e to j): Consist of a framework of stiles, rails and,
in some cases, muntins, with panels of wood, glass or other suitable
material. Panelled construction is capable of wide variation.
(c)

Group 3 Flush Doors: For the purpose .of this Standard this group incluues doors
that present an entirely flush face on both sides. Flush doors consist of a suitable
core covered on both sides with facings of plywood or other suitable sheet
material, with or without lippings to some or all of the edges, and with or without
apertures for glazing or ventilation purposes. Many forms of core construction
.are available. They may be framed or unframed; they may be built up solid
entirely in timber; they may consist of a timber. skeleton with void spaces or of
a timber skeleton filled ill with some other material. A simple flush door for a
cupboard may consist merely of a piece of block board or lamin board.

8.2.1

Doors: Streiigth, Rigidity and Dimensional Stability

8.2~7.1

General

(1)
It is difficult to assess the nature and the magnitude of the stresses that a door is called
upon to resist, it is, therefore, also difficult to lay down any definite requirements for the
strength of doors. The chief factors contributing to the inducement of stresses are:

(i)

The weight of the door.


(ii) Variations in moisture content resulting from either natural or artificial conditions.
'These variations will' cause shrinkage or expansion of the wood, setting up
stresses in the door structure which will tend to cause distortion, opening or
loosening of the joints and fastening or, in extreme cases, splitting.
(iii) Normal wear and tear, which may include repeated slamming, bumping and
similar impacts, and abrasion resulting from continual handling or contact with
articles in a transit through the doorway. Its magnitude may be great or small,
according to the purpose of the door.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

107

-----

-----~-----

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

WOODEN I)OOIlS
~......-n:t-I --Top r

-Closing

COY

mould

edge

"~tLrmQdi

,-F~r.H ~ ~ -V flrace

rledge

Stile-'
'1 'I"

'.~-1+-i-~;d~o~H-j -r; ~
(a)

i"9st
Cia

, ea1

{p)lEDOED
6. BRACED

LEDGED

'11

-V-jointed
boat-diner

bottom

er bo

{d>F2AMED,
lEDOED ~
BRACED

Cd FRAMfD
0.

UOGED

.......

>

-Stile

..

Tongued
bolectiol
mouldin

l!ais"d ~

&ottOll1 r

-+-I-

e.

./

(e)SINOlE PANH

(f)

r::;::

0 .....

Fl"ie)e

t"ail~

"

(9) THItEE PANEL


(top panel gla3ed,
with 9la,iog bars)

PanQI buued

\>;anei bea

$WctionJ or
door-toge

lock. ..a

Rllised ~;>neJ

PAN~L

"

>FoJding _
tose<:u... the

ntermedia te

rllil

t-

Stuck:.
mauldin

/Tof>t"ail~.'J~
BoJedion
moulding

"

Munt

--

Lock toa

SINGU

c::

BJing b

1...

(91~.,ed, with
91"3ing bel's)

(bole<:tion moulded
with I"~ised paneI)

"

Topt"si

II.

rr: tin

--

lin -40----- Sti Ie

Bottom rail

(hlTHREE .PANH
(without muntins)

MAR.G I N
DOOI2.: SiX PANEL

(i) DOU M E

(j) FOUt PANEL


(bead-butt panels)

Figure 8.7 (a-j) Examples of Door Types with Characteristic Treatments

108

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

--

--_.._--~--

CHAPTER 8: ' TIMBER DOORS, WINDOWS INCLUDING FRAMES AND LININGS

(iv) Rough treatment over and above normal war and tear. This may taken any boom;
kicking, bumping and heavy slamming are the most common. This is an
important factor in some cases, e.g. in schools, factories, workshops, and some
public buildings.
The resistance of a door to the stresses to which it is subjected will depend upon
several factors of which the most important are the type and construction of the
door, the species of timber and the quality of the workmanship, particularly in the
jointing of the sev.eral members.
(2) . The various types of doors rely for their strength upon different features of their
construction. Unframed doors depend upon all their parts; braces, where used, add
considerably
to the strength. Framed
.
.. doors whether boarded or panelled, rely mainly upon the
framing, 'although the filling (boarding or panels) is important in offering resistance to kicks and
bumps. In boarded types, the boarding, and braces, where these are used, both contribute to
the rigidity and strength. Flush doors obtain their strength from
the whole of their structure.
.
The facings of a hollow-core door are not merely coverings but make an important contribution
to the strength of the door; for this reason, it is important than an efficient bond should be
obtained between' them and the core.

(3)
The use of large sections for the structural members of doors will tend to solidity of
construction and will give strength to resist externally applied stresses; on the other hand, the
larger the member, the greater will be the internal stresses setup by variations in moisture
content.
(4)
Building-up to the larger sections with two or morenarrow pieces, gluded together, will
minimize this disadvantage.
(5)
The boards of unframed doors are held together by means of the ledges which run across
them. In framed doors, strength is largely dependent upon the joints between the framing
members.. The jointing of the members of a hollow core or of the pieces forming a laminated
core of a flush door, is of less importance, as the covering on each side binds the whole
together.
(6)
The strength of braced doors is dependent upon the direction in which the braces run.
They should run diagonally upwarded from the hanging edge, to counter act any tendency to
drop or sag (see Figure 8b) and d; in doors/wung so that the weight is evenly balanced, such
as sliding doors, the braces should oppose one another. The advantages of braces will be
reduced if they are inclined at less than 45 to the horizontal. The strength of panelled doors

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

109

--

UTlUZA nON OF TIMBER

is largely a matter of the spacing of rails and muntins, or in other words of panel' sizes, and of
the thickness and strength of the panels themselves in relation to their sizes. Similarly, the
strength of flush doors will depend upon the balance between' the sizes and spacing of the
members of the core, the thickness of the covering and also the method and soundness of'
assembly.

. 8.2.7.2

Unframed doors

The boarding should be tongued-and-grooved, and V-jointed, beaded, at otherwise


suitably jointed to minimize the unsightly appearance of open joist resulting from shrinkage of
the boards.
(1)

(2)
Ledges should be from 6.5cm - 15.3cm away from the top and bottom edges of the
door, the intermediate ledges, as a rule, being spaced at about 90cm centre. Each board should
be nailed with at least two nails, staggered so that one is near each edge of the board and each
edge ,of the rail or brace to which it is being fixed; three nails may be used in fixing to a' wide
ledge. These nailing patterns are shown in Figure. 8a. The practice of screwing the two outer
boards, adopted primarily for ease in making doors by hand, probably helps rigidity.

(3)
The size of the outer door will dictate the sizes of the ledgesbut, to assist rigidity by
allowing nails to be spaced farther apart, the bottom ledge and at least one other should be as
wide as practicable; this second wide ledge will conveniently accommodate alack if desired,
and this will often determine its position. Braces should preferably be housed into the ledges
as shown in Figure. 7b; the shoulder which takes 'the direct thrust being at right angles to the
seating.
(4)

8.2.7.3

The top cages of all ledges should be splayed to prevent the lodgement of water.

Framed doors

(1)
In all framed doors, and particularly those that are side hung. Sagging is restrained by
the resistance of the joints; for this reason, one or two side rails or ledges are desirable.

(2)
In framed and boarded doors, the treatment is the same 'as for unframed doors, but the
boarding should be tongued into grooves in the stiles and top rail and should pass across the
faces ofthe intermediate and bottom ledges, to project about 2cm. below the ledges, as show
in Figure 7c and

110- EBCS - 5

1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

"

"-_ ....- , , - ' - - - - - - - - '-~~

,----"~---~---

CHAPTER 8: TIMBER DOORS, WINDOWS INCLI/DING FRAMES AND UNINGS


(3)

A brace may with or without being framed, be:


notched into the rail or ledge clear of the stiles at each end;
fitted into the angle 01 junction between the stile and the rail or ledge at each end;
or
(iii) notched into the ledge.or rail at its upper end and into the hanging stile at it lower
end. The last method is generally considered the best.

(i)
(ii)

8.2.7.4

Flushdoon

(1)
Vent holes in the top, and bottom edges of II door and through the interior core members
may ,by the circulation of air through the interior, help to prevent distortion. With a hollow
core, blocks will be necessary for the fixing of locks, linges, door closures and other fittings.
It is desirable to protect all, edges of the covering by a lipping, although, as a measure
of economy it is sometiInes restricted to the two vertlt.a1 edgt:$ of a hard board-faced door and
often omitted altpgether from a plywood-faced door. Lippings may show as a narrow'margin

(2)

on the face or trlay be mitred witkplywood facings.


,

(e)

There iSRa reliable information regarding the relative strengths of mortise-and


tenon and dowel joints used in the framing of doors. With efficient workmanship'
, and suftablegluing in both cases, the choice of Joints depends, therefore, on its
suitability: for any particular requirement,
The type and size of the lock to be used may affect the design of the joint; for
instance, tenons or dowels in a joint should be so spaced that the fitting of a
mortice lock will not weaken the joint.

'I

8.2.& Doors:

Panels

(1)
Panels may be of solid wood, plywood hardboard or of most types of composition
boards glass or any other suitable material. For external doors exposed to the weather, plywood

should be of the type recommended for exterior use. The suitability of composition boards
depends mainly upon the surfacing material employed. The tendency of the materials, used in
panels, to expand and contract with changes. in moisture content should be provided for. There
is not as yet, sufficient experience in the useof synthetic resin materials (plastics) 'as a substitute
for glass to enable their use to be recommended. Open work panels of any suitable material '

my be used.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

~BCS 5 1995111

"
.
.
.
--_
....- - - - - - - - - -

~----'---------------

----------- ~---

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

-(2)
Solid wooden panels are often made flush with the door framing on one or both sides
of the door to conceal the gap that will result from shrinkage of the wood. The panels
themselves are often beaded at the edges parallel to the grain; this treatment is known as bead
butt' panels and is illustrated in Figure 8.8.

Figure 8.8 Bead-and-Butt Panels


8.2.9 Frames and Linings
(1)
The first essential requirement of a door frame is that it should be strong enough to
carry the door without support from the wall or partition. A lining, on the other hand, is
primarily intended to cover the reveals and soffit of the opening, the carrying of the door being
an additional function. It is not the purpose of either a door frame or lining to give support to
walls or partitions or to carry applied loads; they should, there fore, not be used for this
purpose unless specially designed.
(2)
-The sizes of the parts of frames and linings should be proportioned in relation to the size
and weight of the door; the type of hinges and any spring closing devices will necessitate a
- strong section than would other wise be needed. With thin linings and where doors are to be
hung on any kind-of face-fixing hinges there should be sufficient width and thickness of timber
to accommodate the screws for fixing the hinges without involving the risk of splitting the
timber.
(3)
Different types of linings in general use are shown in (Figure 8.9) the types shown at
c and f, whether in one width or jointed, are normally used in walls and partitions up to about
280mm thick. In thicker walls the types shown at b,d or e may be used. Lining may also be
used in conjunction with a frame, to provide a finishing to the reveals and soffit of the opening
in thick walls.
(4)
Frames in partitions formed of blocks or slabs 76mm or less in thickness should be of
one of the forms shown in Figure 8.9 g, h, and i. The form shown in Figure 8.9.9g, with a
groove 6.4 to 9.5mm deep to take the edge of the partition, is build in with partition; the
purpose of the groove is partly to assist in aligning the partition and partly to give the frame
lateral support from it. Where frames are to be fixed after the partition has been erected, the
groove may be formed by rebating the frame and planting a ground on one side as shown in

112

EBCS 61995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER' 8: TIMBER DOORS, WINDOWS INCLUDING FRAMES AND LININGS

Fi&ute 8.9h or by planting grounds oil both sides of the frame as shown in Figure 8.9i where
adequate suppo~ cannot be obtained from the partition, either the posts or the head of the frame
should be extended and secured. to the structure surrounding the partition.
~ough

Cia} FR.AME WITH

J>LA,SnUD UVEAL
(c)

ground

Reba t-e"I-"""'"' ,,'


.
FIXlng 9rounds~
SOLID L1NINOS,

DOUP>LE

~E&ATEb

Linings jointed if
lUidHi demands

~8nellinq""""""l
Filcing grounds
Il.Qugh 91"Ound

.'Pellet.piece
(d) PANElLED
. LININGS

, ----7 Ooor .

2'~

'Architrave .
Oroov.d rreme

~))~ ...
:';'0.'3,\2

,.::-:-Doo/'

(h).
-/

~~a';;~\~::d"

(9)

~~

2ebate
Architrave
I!.ebated sl'"<:hib....ve

(g),

----

~u9h gl"Ound ~

. ,:. .

::-Dool"--:::__ ,~ :;:::,'

---

'....r=r!

SOLID LININGS,
SING LE .RUAUD

(r)

l~,

(i)
.

i~
.
Door/--~
----

"~

(h) AND (i) F~AMES INTHINPAItTITIONS

Figure 8.9 Typical Door Frames. and Linings

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

113

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

8.2.10 SIZES OF DOOR SETS, DOOR LEAVES AND FRAMES


(a) Size of internal door setsr-.
(1)
The sizes of internal doors sets and their component parts shall be as given in the
Table 8.1
Table 8.1 Sizes. of Internal Door Sets and their Component Parts
DbnlllL!lllmS

SlUlImm

l'efJlJl,'Sllbie

dcviIilion mm
Dcscriplim

Symbol
A

Co-ordinating dimension height of door leaf height sets

2100

Co,ordinatiog dimensiOll height of ceilinB height set

2300
2350
2AOO
2700
3000

Co-ordlnatiog dbnensloo: width of all door sets. (S.sln8lc leaf set, D. Dwble leaf set)

600S
700S
llOOSandD
900SandD
1000 Sand D
1200 D
ISOOD
1800 D
2100 D

A,

Work size: height of door leaf height set

2090

G,

Work size: height of ceiling height set

228S

2335
2385

2.0

} 2

268S

2985
B,

Work size: widlhof all door sets (S.SingJe leafset, D Dwble leaf set.)

590 S
690 S
790SandD
890SandD
990SandD

} 2.0

1190 D
1490 D
1790 D
2090 D
d,

Door leaf height: for all doorscts.

2040

e,S

Widih of door leaf used in sln8le leaf sets (F. flush leaf, P, panel leaf).

526 F
626 F

1.S

} 1.5

726 F& P
826 F&P
. 926F&P
e,d

Widih of one leaf on uncqua1 double leaf doorsct (F. flush leaf, P, panel leaf), (Dimensions of

362 F

pairs of doors assume square meeting stiles with 2mm clearance betwccnlcaves). If rebated

412 F

meeting stiles arc required, Ihen leaf widlh is to be 6.5mm wider !ban stated 10 allow f'?f a

462F

13mm rebate).

} I.S

562 F& P
712 F & P
862 F&P
1012 F & P

Note: Door leaf thickness size 4O-44mm pcnnissabJe deviation


42-46mm permissable deviation 0.5mm.

+ 1-2mmdoor sLOp widlh (solid or oIher wise) 13mm permissable deviation 2m rebate depth

---~ ...

__ . - - - - - ' - - - - - - '

CHAPTER 8: TIMBER DOORS, WINDOWS INCLUDING FRAMES AND UNINGS

Size of external doorsets:

(b)

(i) The sizes of external door sets and their component parts shall be as given in
Table 8.2

Table 8.2 Sizes of External Door Sets and their Component Parts
. Dimension

Size mm

Symbol

Description

Co-ordinating dimension:.
height of door leaf height: .
sets.

2100

Co-ordinating dimension:
height of ceiling height set.

2300
2350

Pennissable deviation mm

2400
2700

3000
B

Co-ordinating dimension
width of all doorsets
(S.Single leaf set, D
double leaf set).

900 S
1000 S
1200 D
1500 D
1800 D
2100 D

Az

work size: height of door


leaf height set.

20)5

Gz

Work size: height of


ceiling height set.

2295
2345
2395
2695

895 S
995S
1195 D
1495 D
1795 D
2095 D

Door leaf: height for all


doorsets,

1994

~s

Width of door leaf in


single leaf sets (F. flush
leaf, P. Panel leaf)

806 F and P
906 F and P

Width of O1\e leaf of


adouble leaf door set (F.
flush leaf; P. Panel leaf).
(Dimensions of pairs of
doors assume square
meeting stiles with 2mm
clearance between leaves if
rebated meeting stiles are
required then leaf width .is
to be 6.5mm wider than
stated to allow for a 13mm
rebate.)

552 F & P
702 F& P
852F&P
1002 F & P

~d

2.0

2995

Work size: width of all


door sets (S. single leaf
set, D. double leaf set).

Bz

2.0

}2

1.5mm

} 1.5

} -1.5

...

--_.---=._.-.--_.:...._~~_.

- - - - - - - - - - -_ ..

-_.

_ _._

_-

~~~-

.:.. __ .:_---~_._.

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

(c)

Sizes of internal and external door leaves (for single doors).


(i)

The size in mm of internal door leaves for single doors shall be as follows
526X2040X40 or 44mm

62t5X2040X40" 44mm

726X2040X40" 44mm

926X2040X40" 44mm

(ii)

The sizes in millmeteres of external door leaves for single doors shall be
as follows :
806X1994X40 or 44

906X1994X40 or 44mm.

8.3

SPECIFICATION FOR TIMBER WINDOWS

8.3.1 Scope
This Code Standard specifies materials, construction, finishes, hardware, fastenings,
installation, and performance standards for timber windows and doors. It also gives a range
of preferred co-ordinating dimensions for windows based on a 200mm multimodule.
(1)

(2)
This Code Standard applies only to windows in exterior walls including structural
joinery.

8.3.2 Classification
(1)

In this Code Standard timber windows are classified as follows (see Figure 8.10):

Fixed light, Fixed sash;

Hinged (top or side, [casement] open out) bottom or side (open in);

Projected (top [awning] or side open out);

Hopper (without hinges);

Pivoted (horizontally or vertically, including spinner windows);

Horizontally Sliding

Vertical Sliding

Closable Louvres

116

EBCS 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

_. .

CHAPTER 8: TIMBER DOORS, WINDOWS INCLUDING FRAMES AND LININGS

EJOJ

Fixed l'ght

Side hung - open out

FIXED

,[j]7'\
,./

.Awning type - prcjected out

:8Ja
Horizontall~ pivoted

Top hung - open oot

.Bottom hung - open

HINGE!?

Ed.0

In

EJ07
HOPPER

(with or without side cheeks! _

"-

"/~

k/

/
-,

"

"

[]

VertiCIII plvoted - centrally or off centre

'I

EEl

/'\JO

Casement tvp

PROJECTED

MO

1\

[EJ

HorizolTtiltlY slidi.nCJ.---7"o .e panel or all pl!1e,ls.-

LZJn

QPel"l

in

All illustrations are "viewed from ouUide"

Fully reversible

...J,...

I"

Closable IOlJ'\!n

Vertically sHding (double hung)

Figure 8.10 Specification for Timber windows

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

117

_..

__

".

.'

.-.------------~---------

UTIUZA T/(p/OF TIMBER


I

8.3.3 Materials
Timbers usedfor frames, mullioIJ% transoms, sashes, beads and other members shall
be as agreed between manufacturer and purchaser and shall be selected for grade, equality &
treatment. Other species-of timbers shallonlybe used by agreement between purchaser and
(1) .

manufacturer .

8.3.4 Weather StrippbJg


(1)
Weather stripping shall be of materials that in the normal condition of use do not react
with timber or its surface coating.
(2)
. In particular it shall be possible to wipe off coatings, site-applied- in-error so that the
flexibility of the weather-stripping is not impaired.
(3)
Where the material itself precludes cleaning down its hall be capable or removal during
painting operations .
.(4)
Whether stripping shalf be capable of being renewed-without removing the frame from
the structure.

8.3.5 Hard ware, Bearing Devices and Fittings


Hard ware 'bearing devices and fittings shall be of materials resistant to atmospheric
corrosion, and selected to avoid dissimilar metal corrosion. .
(1)

(2)
They shall be designed so as to be accessible for Adjustment repair and replacement
. after the window has been installed. When required by the purchase, remote controls shall be
provided for opening lights where ordinary fasteners would be beyond the convenient reach of
adults.

8.3.6 . Fastenings
In addition to, or instead of, joint sealing materials, sash and frame members shall be
brought together, with mechanical fastenings resistant to atmospheric corrosion in their location
and compatible with the timber or its surface coatings.
(1)

118

EBCS - 5 1995

- ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 8: TIMBER DOORS, WINDOWS INCLUDING FRAMES AND LININGS

8.3.6.1

Nails, dowels aPd staples .

(1)
On surfaces exposed to view shall be punched below the surface. Screw heads shall be
countersunk. Fastenings intended for removal .shall be corrosion resistant and capable of
removal without damage to surrounding surfaces.

8.3.6.2
(1)

Fixings

Fixings shall be such that they will adequately;


(a) support the weight of the window; and

8.3.6.3

(b)

resist the loads due to window pressure; and.

(c)

permit adjustment during erection; and

(d)

allow thermal and seismic movement in all atmospheres in which they are
required to serve.

Manufacture'

(1)
The window shall be assembled by the manufacturer or by his duly author; red
representative.

8.3.6.4

Selection olstoct .

(1)
Units of joinery shall be manufactured from the same timber as faP as possible, but if
two or more species have to be used care shall be taken that. such mixing shall not lead to
distortion or unequal reaction to surface coatings.

8.3.7 Joints
(1)
Joints in frames and sashes shall be manufactured to impart adequate strength to the
assembled. unit during manufacture, transportation, storage, installation and use.
(2)
Joints shall be designed, constructed and put together in such away as to prevent the
passage of externally occurring water by capillarity or other wise to interior surfaces, and to
drain any moisture that has entered the joint to the outside. Machined surfaces to be jointed
shall be sealed before coming together.

ETHIOPIAN SUILDING' CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

119

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

8.3.7.1

Jointing generally

Joint faces shall be flush with one another unless other wise required by the design.
Where the end grain of one member shows upon the finished face of another member it shall
be flush with that face.
(1)

8.3.7.2

Mortise and tenon and tongued and grooved joints

In their thickness the tenon and mortise and the tongue and grove shall be parallel and
the tenor or tongue shall be a push fit in the mortise or groove. All surfaces of shoulders and
haunches and tenons and tongues shall be fully coated with adhesive. A mechanical fastening
shall be a driving fit and engage every member of the joint.
(1)

8.3.7.3

Combed joints
The faces of each tenon of a combed joint shall be parallel to one another and each

(1)

individual tenon shall be a push fit in its slotted counterpart. All mating surfaces shall be fully
coated with adhesive and mechanical fastening shall be a driving fit and engage every member
of the joint.

8.3.7.4

Halving joints

The faces of joints shall be flush with one another on surfaces which are intended to
receive final decoration or be exposed to view. The mating surfaces shall be smooth and in
intimate contact and so spread with adhesive as to secure adequate adhesion. A mechanical

(1)

fastening shall secure the joint during the glue curing period.

8.3.7.5
(1)

Mitre joints
Mitre joints shall be machined flush so that the mating surfaces shall be smooth and in

intimate contact and so spread with adhesive as to secure adequate adhesion.


mechanical fastenings shall secure the joint during the glue curing period.

Sufficient

8.3.8 Moving Parts


Sashes, doors and sliding panels shall be placed in relation to the lights that contain
them, or in such a manner that they close over, so that adequate clearances are avaiJahlc for the
moving parts to operate freely on their hard ware without detriment tot he performance of the

(1)

unit.

120

ESCS 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 8: TIMBER DOORS, WINDOWS INCLUDING FRAMES AND LININGS

(2)

.Allowance should be made for paint thickness and for the nominal and compressed

dimensions of weather stripping.

8.'3.9

Protective Coatings

8~3.9.1

Temporary protection

(1) . Windows to receive site applied surface coatings shall be dispatched from the place of
manufacture treated as temporary protection with a water repellent' solution. Each to be
compatible with surface coating applied subsequently.

8.3.9.2
(1)

8.3.9.3
(1)

Priming coats
Priming coats should be applied according to the manufacturer's, Instructions.

Water repellenttreatmenu
Water repellent treatments shall be carried out;
(a)

after profiling but before jointing surfaces are prepared; or

(b)

after jointing surfaces are prepared when compatible with joint sealing materials
or adhesives; or

(c)

after component assembly.

(2)
Where a window is to be clear finished internally and surface coated externally it should
be water repellent treated only before dispatch to the site.

8.3.10

Surface Coatings

8.3.10.1 Timber windows


(1)

Timber windows shall be resistant to degradation;


(a)

by the application and maintenance of surface coatings appropriate tot he timber


sued;or

(b)

by the self-resistance of the timber used; or

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

121

----------_. ~--_._---------

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER .

(c)

by a combination of (a) & (b); or

(d)

by some other means to the satisfastion of the Engineer.

8.3.10.2 Surface coatings


(1)

(2)

Surface coatings shall be applied either;


(a)

on site with the manufacturer's instructioris; or

(b)

in a factory under the manufacturer's control.

Surface coatings shall be shown to the satisfaction of the engineer, either;


(a)

to posses an established record of satisfactory performance and survival over a


considerable period of timber by natural weathering; or
'

(b)

to have provided relevant test information and assessments of the coating


performance in its intended use issued by an approved independent Authority.

(3)
Surface coatings shall be capable of botli touch-up and making good at installation and
of maintenance at the end of their initial life.
8.3.11 Security
(1)
Unless other wise required by the purchaser 00 sash shall be openable or removable by
. hand from the outside when it is fastened in the closed position.
(2)

Where required by the purchaser special locks shall be fitted to the windows.

(3)
Where required by the purchase sashes shall be provided with fittings which restrict
them in their ventilating positions without loss of security.
8.3.12 Safety
(1)

Where required by the purchaser additional safety fittings may be provided as follows:
(a)

Limit .catches- Limit catches shall check


. the opening of any large sash, of what
ever type, at an aperture of approximately 100mm. To permit the windows to be

122 EBCS - 5

1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 8: TIMBER DOORS, WINDOWS INCLUDING FRAMES AND UNINGS

opened more widely, the catches shall be capable of being un fastened by means
that are not readily operable by small children. The catches shall re-engage
automatically when the windows are closed.
(b)
1

Reversing catches- Reversing catches shall hold pivoted sashes firmly when
reversed for cleaning or other maintenance. They shall engage automatically
when the sash is reversed, and shall need some deliberate action to undo them
. when the sash is to be closed.

It shall not be possible for any sash to become accidentally disengaged from the frame.

(2)

8.3.13

Protection

8.3.13.1 Site storage


(1)
At all times prior to installation the windows shall be stacked flat or on edge in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions, slightly raised from the ground "and adequately
protected from the weather with tarpaulins or heavy duty polyethylene to maintain moisture
content.

8.3.13.2 Window putty


Windows putty glazed in the factory should always be stacked on edge. Putty glazed
windows are easily damaged in transit by breaking the putty/glass seal. Bead glazing is
recommended for this method.

(1)

(2)
Surfaces exposed to view shall be free of damage and in shop condition at the effective
completion of the works.
8~3.13.3

(1)

Responsibilities

The manufacturer or his representative shall be responsible for protection during


(a)

Manufacture; and where this forms part of his service

(b)

Transport to site, unloading and stacking; and

. (c)

Installation.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

123

OHtlONtI.1S 300:1 DNI07lnS NtlltlOIH.13

966 t 9 - S~S3

tZI

[XNV'IH .L!I3'I A.'I'IVNOI.LNa~NI 3DVd SIRl]

H3SWI.1 :/0 NOI.1 vznun

-----~--~-----

----

CHAPTER

,PLYWOOD CONSTRUCTION, STRUCTURAL


TIMBERS & GLUE-LAMINATED MEMBERS

9.1

SCOPE

(1)
This Code Standard specifies requirements for structural timber members manufactured
from timber laminations assembled with the grain directions in the laminations approximately
parallel with each other and with the major axis of the member, and glued together to form a
member which functions as a single structural unit.
(2)
This Code Standard does not preclude the use of techniques or materials other than those
specified', provided that such new techniques or materials can be proved by appropriate
performance testing to be equal or-better than those described herein.
(3)
The adhesives specified in this standard have been limited to those with a proven longterm satisfactory performance.

9.2

DEFINITIONS

cramping

the application of pressure by means ofa screw press or by other means.

cramping pressure the force applied during manufacture of in cramping the contact faces of
, glued laminations divided by the area of a single glue line over which the
force acts.
glue line

the adhesive layer between two laminates.

glue spread

the quantity of adhesive per unit area of glue line..

laminating

the process of bonding laminations with an adhesive.

lamination

a layer of wood in a laminated member. The lamination may be formed


from several boards, end-jointed or side-jointed, or both, so as to extend
to the full width and length of the member.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

125

--~_-----:-'

----~--~._- - -

- '- '

- - - - - ... - - -

------_ .. _-----

- - - - - - - -------

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

pressure area

the area of the assembly that is under cramping pressure during the
gluecuring period.

sample. ,

a full cross section of the laminated product used for the purposes of
quality control.

wood failure

the area of wood fibre remaining on the glue line following completion of
the shear or cleavage test. It is expressed as a percentage of total test area
excluding any area of wood defect.

9.3

MATERIALS

9.3.1 Timber
(1)
The timber used for laminations shall be stress-graded inaccordance the relevant
Ethiopian Standard. Where sapwood is present the provisions of sapwood containing more
than 5 % incross-section that is susceptible to lyctid borers shall be treated against lyctid.

9.3.2 Maximum Thickness of Laminations


(1)
In straight work or cambered beam, the finished thickness of any lamination shall not
exceed 50mm plus the variation allowed.
(2)
In curved work the thickness of the lamination shall be governed by the requirements
of the design, the curvature, and the species of the timber used.
(3)
However, in no case shall the maximum thickness of the lamination given in this clause
be exceeded.

9.3.3 Variation in Thickness of Laminations


The variation in thickness over the whole length and width of a lamination shall not
exceed 0.2mm.
(1)

Note: For timber of a density equal to or greater than 600 kg/m', a smaller tolerance may be
necessary.

126

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 9: PLYWOOD CONSTRUCTION, STRUCTURAL, TIMBERS & GLUE-LAMINA TED


MEMBERS

9.3.4 Moisture Content


(1)

The moisture content of the laminations at the timber of gluing shall be not less than

6 % and not more than 15 %.

9.4

ADHESIVES

9.4.1

General

(1)

Only the following types of adhesives only, shall be used for lamination:

(2)

(a)
(b)

Casein
Resorcinol

(c)
(d)

Phenol Resorcinols
Poly phenolic (tannis)

The above types of adhesive shall have the PH value greater than 3.

9.4.2 Adhesives
(1)

Adhesives shall comply with the following requirements except that casein adhesives

shall not be required to comply with items (b) and (c) below.
(a)

Dry test.

When conditioned and tested the average percentage wood failure shall

be as follows:

(b)

(i)

For soft woods or species of group class 1 not less than 70 %.

(ii)

For species of group class 2 and 3 not less than 50 %. The adhesives shall
be tested using wood of the species being laminated.

Cold soak test. When subjected to vacuum pressure impregnation in accordance


with appendix B,and tested wet in accordance with item (a) above.

(A)

(i)

The resultant bond strength shall be not less than 60 % of the dry strength

(ii)

and
The mean wood failure shall be

for Group 1 Density Species ... not less than 70 % and

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 7995

127

-----'--------~-_._---

----

---- ----_ .. _~-_ ..

_- - - - - - - - - - - - - -

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

(B)

for Group 2 and 3 density species ... not less than 50 %.

(2)
A similar number of specimens matched with those in item (a) above and prepared at
the same time shall be used.
(c)

Boil test:- When specimens are completely immersed in boiling water for 72h
and then tested when wet in accordance with item (b) above at room temperature.
(i)
(ii)

The resultant average bond strength shall be not less than 50 % of the dry
strength and
The mean wood failure shall be

(A)

for Group 1 density species .... not less than 70 % and

(B)

for Group 2 and 3 density species not less than 50 %.

9.5

MANUFACTURING REQUIREMENTS

9.5.1

Laminations

9.5.1.1

Cleanliness

(1)
At the time of gluing, the surface of laminations shall be clean and free from oil, dust,
excessive natural resin, surface deposits of preservative salts and any other substanc.e liable to
affect the production of maximum glue line strength;

9.5.1.2

Machining

The surface of the laminations shall be machine dressed using a knife planer, surface
glazing shall be avoided with timbers that are difficult to glue and those which have been
preservative treated, machining shall be carried out immediately before gluing.
(1)

Note: Gluing properties of timber surfaces deteriorate rapidly after machining. Advantages
in the quality of bond may be obtained if the time between machining and gluing is as
short as possible.

128 EBCS 5

1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

-----_. __..'-------~

--

----.

__ .

CHAPTER 9: PLYWOOD CONSTRUCTION, STRUCTURAL, TIMBERS & GLUE-LAMINA TED


MEMBERS

9.5.1.3

Removal and patching of defects

Permitted defects may be removed from lamination and replaced by a clear timber insert
not larger than the maximum permissible defect in the grade of the timber being used.

(1)

(2)
The insert shall fit closely, the direction of the grain shall be the same as that of the
lamination, and the adhesive used to glue it in place. shall be the same as- that us~ in the
laminatien,

9.6

END JOINTS IN LAMINATIONS

9.6.1

General

End-joints sl\~ll be accurately machined and cleanly cut without tearing, loosening or
crushing of fibres, but shall not be sanded.
(1)

(2)
Accuracy of machining shall be such that mating surfaces assembled under light pressure
without glue do not permit the insertion of a feeler gauge O.lOmm thick at any point in the
joint. Where joints of laminations are pre-glued the tolerance on the thickness of the timber
after jointing,- shall comply with 9.5.1.2.

9.6.2 Scarf Joints


Scarf joints shall be pre-glued to form full-length laminations before the general lay-up
provision shall be made in the fabrication process to ensure that the scarf joints are maintained
in position during clamping so that the following requirements are complied with:
(1)

(a)

The pressure necessary for the required joint strength is maintained 'on all surfaces
until the glue is cared.

(0)

Slope of grain of the timber in the area of the scarfs is not steeper than the slope
of the scarf and not against the scarf slope.

(c)

Knots in scarfs are approximately perpendicular to the board and their diameter
does not exceed the thickness of the timber at the pint at which they occur.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

129

...- - - - - - -

--"-'

---_._-~--'_
.._._- .

~~~-----_._--_.-

----------------

UTlUZA TlON OF TIMBER

.9.6.3 Finger Joints


If end finger-jointing is used in the manufacturing process care shall be taken to prevent
mismating or 'misalignment of the joints at, the timber of gluing. Means shall be provided to
ensure that the endpressures which are applied to the joint at the timber of gluing are uniform
and adequate for the type of joint and the gluing process involved.
(1)

,9.6.4 Butt Joints


(1)
Butt joints shall be used only in straight beams and the straight portion of curved
.structural members. Butt joints shall be cut square and shall abut one another as tightly as
possible. The various boards making up a single lamination shall be adequately fastened to
adjacent laminations to prevent movement during assembly.

9.6.5 Staggering of Butt Joints or other Non-structural End Joints joints.


(1)
Butt joints and non-structural end-joints shall not be closer than a distance equal to six
times the lamination thickness(t) measured parallel to the longitudinal axis of the beam, unless
they are separated by at least three laminations.

9.6.6 Edge-joints
Edge-joints are permissible and provided that they comply with the requirements of this
standard may be assuMed to develop with fall strength of the timber,
(1)

9.7

GLUING

9.7.1 Spreading
(1)
The glue shall be spread evenly at the correct rate over the whole area to be bonded.
Spreading on adjacent laminated faces is preferred.

9.7.2 Control of Temperature


(1)
At the time of assembly and during the cure of the adhesive the timber shall be at a
temperature not less than that specified by the adhesive manufacturer.

130

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 9: PLYWOOD CONSTRUCTION, STRUCTURAL, TIMBERS & GLUE-LAMINA TED


MEMBERS

9.7.3 Cramping Pressure


The cramping pressure shall be uniform over the whole gluing area.
accordance with the glue manufacturer's instructions for the glue-used.

(1)

It shall be in

(2)
Application of pressure shall be either from one-end towards the other or from a position
within the assembly towards both ends. The application of pressure at a suitable temperature
shall be completed within the closed assembly time of the glue, when a fairly continuous '
squeeze out' or bead along the edge of each glue-line shall be produced.
(3)
Pressure shall be checked about 15 min after the initial cramping to ensure that there has
been no reduction.
(4)

Full pressure shall be maintained during the whole curing time of the glue.

(5)
Nails or staples driven by impact as means of applying pressure shall not be used unless
the assembly is so designed.

9.8

CONTROL OF PRODUCTION

9.8.1

General

(1)
The manufacturer shall maintain adequate quality control of production and shall keep
records of the following:
(a)

The type manufacturer (or brand name), batch number, delivery date, expiry date
and the use made of the adhesives.

(b)

The thickness of the laminations.

(c)

The moisture content of the laminations, at the time of gluing.

(d)

Details of the Adhesive mix.

(e)

The glue spread.

(f)

The opened and closed assembly times.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS57995

131

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

(g)

For glues allowed to set, to room temperature , the minimum and maximum
ambient temperatures during the curing of the glue inclose proximity of the
assembly.

(h)

The applied pressure used to cure the glue-line.


(i) Timber preservative or other treatment of laminations and whether applied
before or after assembly.

G) All routine tests have to be carried out.

9.8.2 Site Gluing


If site gluing is under taken on members wholly dependent on the adhesive for their
strength and stiffness, the requirements of this standard shall be complied with as if the work
were under taken in a properly equipped workshop.
(1)

9.9

INSPECTION AND TESTING

9.9.1

Inspection

After fabrication and machining, and prior to patching and finishing glued-laminated
members shall be inspected by the manufacturer to ensure that the requirements of this standard
have been complied with during fabrication.
(1)

9.9.2

Block Shear Test

9.9.2.1

Requirements

When determined in accordance with Appendix A, the failing stress of any specimen
shall not be less than 3-5 times the dry basic stress in shear in beams specified for the stress
grade of the beam or lamination if mixed grades are use~ .For timber of density less than or
equal to 600 kg/m" the average value of wood failure -shall be not less than 70 %. Any glue
line of 50 % wood failure or less shall fail the sample for the timber of density greater than 600
kg/m? the average value of wood failure shall be not less than 50 %. Any glue Iine of less than
30 % wood failure shall fail the sample.
(1)

132

EBCS 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 9:' PLYWOOD CONSTRUCTION, STRUCTURAL, TIMBERS & GLUE-LAMINATED


MEMBERS

9.9.3

Cleavage Test

9.9.3.1

Requirements

(1)
When determined in accordance with Appendix B, the average wood failure for all
gluelines in a specimen shall be not less than 60 %. Any glueline of less than 30 % shall fail
the specimen.
9.9.4

Wet Cleavage Test

9.9.4.1

Requirements

(1)
When determined inaccordance with Appendix C the average wood failure for all glue
line sin a. specimen shall not be less than 60 %. Any glue line of less than 30 % shall fail the
specimen.

9.10

CLASSIFICATION OF PLY WOOD DURABILITY

9.10.1 Compliance
(1)

(2)

Basically plywood durability can be classified into the following four classes.
G.

Plywood for general purposes

E.

Plywood having a high resistance to wood borer attack but not to termites and
decay.

M.

Plywood rated moderately resistance or better to decay but not necessarily


resistant to certain types of wood borer attack, ego termites and lyctus, unless
treated.

H.

Plywood having a high level of resistance to decay but not necessarily resistant
to certain types of wood borer attack, e.g termites, unless treated.

No plywood shall allow the inclusion of live wood-boring insects.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

133

--_._--_. __ ._-~-~._--_._. _._--~_. -~-

--~~--~-----'----------~_:...... - -

UTlU~ TlON" OF

9.11

TIMBER

CRITERIA FOR CLASSIFICATION OF PLYWOOD DURABILITY

9.11.1 General
(1)
Durable plywood shall be classified according to the criteria specified in A.2 to A.S and
is obtained by the use of:
(a)

veneers of timber having a natural resistance to biological-degrade;

(b)

veneers of timber which although not naturally durable are given an effective
preservative treatment to render them durable either prior to or after manufacture
into plywood; or

(c)

a combination of naturally durable and effectively treated timber.

9.11.2 Natural durability of untreated timber


(1)
The natural durability rating of a plywood timber against fungal attack shall be as given
in PRL Technical Note No. 40,1981. Where reference is made to a five class scale:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

very durable;
durable;
moderately durable;
non-durable;
perishable.

9.11.3

Preservative Treatment

9.11.3.1

Types of Preservative

(1)
The substances used for the treatment of veneer or plywood shall be those coming with
in the following:
(2)

The preservative and the classification specified in this standard are:

.Class TO
Tar oil preservatives
Coal tar creosote
Coal tar oil types of wool preservatives.

134 EBCS - 5

7995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODt STANDARD

CHAPTER 9: PLYWOOD CONSTRUCTION, STRUCTURAL, TIMBERS & GLUE-LAMINA TED


MEMBERS

ClassWB

Water born type preservatives

Coper/chrome/Arsenic (CCA)

Disodium Octaborate and

Class as

Orgainc Solvent type preservative

i.e pentachlorophenol

bis (tri-n-butyltin) oxide

metal naphthenates combinations of the above.

Class GLA.

Insecticide or fungicide added directly to the glue.

9.11.3.2 Methods of treatment


(1)

The method of treatment shall be one of the following:


. (a)

for veneer:
(i)

wet veneer by diffusion (water-born preservatives applied by immersion,


spray, deluging, etc.);
(ii) dry veneer by immersion or double vacuum treatment (organic solvent
preservatives) or by pressure i~pregnation (water-born preservative);
(iii) incorporation of diffusible preservative into the glue.
(b)

for plywood: double vacuum or immersion treatments (organic solvent


preservatives) or pressure impregnation (Taroil or water bom- preservatives).

9.11.3.3 Bonding
(1)
As some types of preservative treatment affect the subsequent gluing behaviour of veneer
it shall be ensured to that of plywood bond standard by inspection and rebounding.

9.11.3.4 Condition of veneer or plywood be fore and after treatment


(1)
The moisture content of plywood to be treated with preservatives of classes TO,OS, and
WB shall not exceed 25 %. Wet veneer to be treated by diffusion shall be wet and M.e not less
than 50%.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS51995

135

-_.---=....:.._-_
-._---'------------_
..

___ . _ - - - - -

UT!LlZA TION OF TIMBER

(2)

Dry veneer to be treated with water born salts shall not exceed 25 % M.C.

9.12

END USE OF PLYWOOD OR LAMINATED TIMBER

(1) .

Based on its properties ply wood can be used in many different areas:

Table 9.1
. (1) Furniture

Bedroom and dining room, suites,book cases and shelving contract,


office furniture drawer sides, cabinets knock down furniture and built
in unites, cupboards. etc.

(2) Air Craft Industry

Access Equipment, Gliders and glider boxes, jigs, light air craft
components mock-ups.

(3) Building
Construction

Building components, beams, gussets, stressed skin panels portal


frames, concrete fonnwork, external cladding flooring, flush doors,
interior panelling partitions prefabricated units, framed buildings
mobile office units tools and garden sheds, roofing, sheathings.

(4) Marine uses

Bulk heads, car, ferry decks, Deck houses, hold covers and linings,
Hulls of motors and sailing boats, interior fittings panelling etc.

(5) Packing and


Handling Industry

Air freight, pallets and containers Barrels, boxes and packing cases of
all kinds, food containers and trays, pallets, vehicle crates.

(6) Agricultural Work

Beehives, building elements, beams, doors, floors barns partitions


purlins, Cattle sheds, green houses and staging water tanks, Store
houses, Storage bins Rearing units.

(7)Shop fitting and


display

Bar fitting, Counters, display cabinets, exhibitions Stands, and Kiosks,


External fittings, Shop fronts, Screens, Shelving etc.

(8) Theatre and


Cinema Equipment

Lightening Equipment, projector Stands, stage floors Temporary and


Permanent seatings.

Note: Plywood has got many wide areas to be useO,such as


(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

for toys and pastimes construction


transport and motor vehicles
Musical instrument
Marine uses and
miscellaneous industrial uses.

136 EBCS 6

1996

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER

10

WOOD FLOORING BLOCKS

10.1

INTRODUCTION

(1)
This Code Standard does not specifically deal with the selection and means of fixing
impermeable coverings to wood floors, However there are certain precautions that should be
observed when such coverings are subsequently to be applied.

(2)
The words 'timber' and 'wood' in this Code Standard cover softwoods, hard woods,
plywood, hard board, blockboard and chip board as may be appropriate in the context.

10.2

SCOPE

This Code Standard gives recommendations for laying the following types of flooring
of wood and wood products.
(1)

(a)

board and strip

(b)

block

(c)

mosaic

(d)

overlay and parquet

(e)

wood based panel products

(2)
The Code Standard does not deal with the protection afforded to a floor by floor
coverings or surface finishes.
(3)
This Code Standard does not deal with floors for temporary structures or floors intended
for limited use.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995137

UTlLIZA TION OF TIMBER

(4)
Different considerations may apply to these floors. For definition of terms refer to
Clause 10.3.

10.3

DEFINITIONS

",osaic finger

a small solid wood component of regular form with machine


planed edges, fire sawn or planed faces and fine sawn ends.

component module

an assembly of mosaic fingers placed edge to edge to form a


square or other shape,

wood mosaic panel

a single layer of component. modules pre assembled and held


together to form a panel or tile.

sub./loor

the base on which the wood mosaic parquet or an underlay is to


be laid.

underlay

a layer of sheet materia. fixed to a wooden sub floor or a layer.of


material spread upon a concrete subfloor in a plastic condition to
produce a panel and smooth sub floor to which wood mosaic
parquet is to be bonded.

short tongue

a tongue reduced in its width.

face

that surface upon which the quality of the board is determined


when grading is based on face appearance.

width & thickness

the width and thickness of the sawn board at the time of grading.

.parcel

quantity of sawn timber of the same basic size, quality and


description.

planing

machine process by which the thickness and/or width of a piece


of timber of rectangular cross section are/is made uniform
throughout its length.

moisture content

amount of water, bound or free that is present in timber and wood


based panel products usually expressed as a percentage of the
oven dry mass.

138

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

.~--_._-_

..

_...

CHAPTER 10: WOOD FLOORING BLOCKS

regularizing

Process by means of which every piece of a batch of


constructional timber is sawn and/or machined to a uniform
width.

sampling

unless otherwise agreed between purchaser and vendor testing


shall be carried out on at least 10 pieces or 3 % of the pieces of
anyone thickness taken at random which ever is the greater. The
average of the total readings taken shall be the average moisture
content.

method of measurement

the test shall be carried out according to the instrument


manufacturer's instructions, on the wider face of the piece at a
point not nearer than 1m from either end or at the centre of the
piece if under 2m long.

permissible deviation of
moisture content

basic working stress

for any specified moisture content agreed between the purchaser


and the vender a maximumdeviation of 3 % shall be permissible
in any piece.
the stress appropriate to an arbitrarily chosen but constant, basic
reference set of conditions. It is derived from the known strength
properties of a timber due allowance having been made for such
factors as material variability, long duration loading, grade of
timber and a safety factor.
>

certifying engineer

a registered engineer who after due inspection and adequate re


inspection and examination of test procedure and results will
certify his opinion as to compliance with the Standard for
mechanically stress graded timber.

grade

the lowest class for modules of elasticity as a plank indicated on


the piece.

grading period

the duration of mechanical grading operation carried out on the


one day using the one grading programme for the one size of
timber.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 7995139

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

grading programme

specifies the modulus of elasticity as a plank (EP) levels


required to be discriminated or (rejected) by the machine in
order to produce timber to specified stress grades.

masters

standard gauges or other standards measuring devices used to


check timber stress grading procedures.

mechanically stress graded timber

any piece of timber to which specific values for basic working


stress in bending and mean modulus of elasticity have been
assigned based on the minimum modulus of elasticity as a
plank measured by the grading machine.

operator

. the organization that operates the timber stress grading


machine.

stress grade

a value assigned to a piece of timber to indicate the basic


working stress in bending for the purpose of structural timber
design and by implication the basic working stresses for other
properties normally used in engineering design.

test span

the span over which a mechanical stress grading machine


grades apiece of timber.

test specimen

a prepared piece of timber 'for testing taken from the sample.

testing authority

a testing laboratory registered with the testing laboratory


registration council for carrying out the test required.

veriflcalt.n stick

a piece of timber or other suitable material of known modulus


of elasticity at all points along its length of known width and
thickness and certified by the testing Authority.

bale

element that supports the flooring.

vapour check

material or part of a construction element that offers a high


resistance to the passage of water vapour.

140

ESCS 6 1996

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

--~--

----------

CHAPTER 10: WOOD FLOORING BLOCKS

flooring

upper layer of a floor providing a finished surface; including


wood board and strip, block, mosaic overlay and parquet and
wood based panel products.

fixed floor

method of construction where the flooring is fixed directly to


the base.

floating floor

upper part of a floor laid upon

a: base sometimes withresilient

material between, without being positively fixed.


,
I

1
I

suspended floor

floor that spans between (local) supports.

wood board flooring

length of hard wood or softwood section spanning between


bearers with the width of a board being greater than lOOmm.

wood strip flooring

length of hard wood or softwood section spanning between


bearers with the width of strip being IOOmm or less.

block flooring

softwood or hard wood blocks with a system of interlocking.

end grain block flooring

flooring of softwood or hard wood blocks with the wearing


surface at right angles to the grain.

The blocks are 75rnm

deep.

mosaic flooring

panels comprising squares assembled from softwood or hard


wood fingers held together by a removable surface membrane
or fixed flexible backing.

overlay

Pre-finished panels or interlocking wood strips of proprietary


manufacture for direct application to a fully supporting base.

parquet

hardwood strip or strip of proprietary manufacture in long or


short lengths according to pattern requirement, for' direct
application to a fully supporting base.

panel flooring

plywood, blockboard, flooring type chipboard and hardboard


panels having square, rebated or tongue and grooved edges.

flooring thickness

finished thickness of the flooring prior to installation

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995141

UTiLiZA TlOIfJ OF TIMBER

10.4

MATERIALS

10.4.1 Classification of Timber


(1)

The classification of timber as soft wood and hard wood is botanical.

(2)

Soft wood belongs to the order coni ferae (conifers) these include podocarpus, Junipreous

procera, and all soft woods, Hard wood belongs to the order dicotyledineae (broad leaf trees)
which include Olea wilwitchii, Pygeum Africanum, Celtis Africana, Chlorophora Exelssa
(lROKO), etc.

10.4.2 Basic Recommendations


(1)

Freedom from defects, all wood flooring should be free from


(a)

rot;

(b)

active insect attack;

(c)

such defects as will detract from the suitability of the flooring, ego splits, shakes
and loose knots, however, for soft woods within the scope. Some minor defects'
are permissable.

In hard woods, firm knots and pin holes normally are

unacceptable.
(2)

Colour variations; Natural colour variations in both soft wood and hard wood are to be

expected.

If a particular uniformity is required arrangement should be made between the

manufacturer and the contractor.

10.4.3 Blocks
(1)

Soft wood and hard wood blocks should be between 200mm and 500mm long with a

face width not greater than 90mm and thickness not less than 20mm with at least 9mm of clear
wearing thickness above the interlocking system.

10.4.4 Mosaic Fingers


(1)

Mosaic fingers should be lOOmm to 165mm long with a thickness of 6mm to 10mm and

width 20tnm to 25mm. The layout of the individual fingers within a panel should be such as
to maintain a regular pattern over the whole of the floor.

142

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

~_

- -

- - - - - - - _ "_ _"_0

---

" - - - - - - - - - - - -

" __
- 0

--~_._--------_._"

CHA.PTER 10: WOOD FLOORING BLOCKS

10.4.5 Parquet Strips


(1)

Parquet strips should be not less than 6mm thick.

10.4.6 Nails
(1)

Except where masonry nails are recommended it must be from the following list:
round plain head nails (normal nails);
(2)
round lost head nails;

(3)" oval lost head nails;

(4)
oval brad head nails;
(5)
annular-ringed shank flat head nails ('improved' nails);
(6) clout nails;
(7)
panel pins.
(1)

(2)
In addition, the use of lost head screw shank nails or machine nailing using a portable
nailing machine, is permissible,
In both cases it is essential that the menufacturer's
recommendations regarding usage are strictly adhered to.

10.5

PERFORMANCE FA.CTORS

10.5.1 General
(1)
The suitability of wood for flooring use depends on resistance to wear, resistance to
dimensional change (movement), appearance and other factors. Quarters-sawn material, which
is very expensive and not readily available, usually gives better wear than plain sawn stock.
(2)
Plywood has some advantages in economy of material and in fixing but, due to
comparative thinness of face veneers, has less tolerance to wear than solid boarding.

10.5.2 Wetting and Humidity


(1)
Where the range of atmospheric humidity is likely to be wide or where seasonal
moisture content changes are likely to be large, e.g. in a heated floor, it is advisable to keep
the width of the floor boards as narrow as practicable. If the floors is to be subjected to
frequent wetting, species having good durability and low movement should be chosen and
.should either be given oleoresinous treatment or be sealed. Seals should be one or two parts
polyurethane.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995143

" --_0..

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

(2)
Seals provide excellent wearing properties but may produce 'fissure cracking' in newly
installed floors. One part mixes because they are ready to use, have advantages on a building
site. The manufacturer's recommendations should be followed when using all these materials.

10.5.3 Resistance to Abrasions


(1)
Tt is emphasized that none of the normal finishes for floors can-up-grade, the
classification in the table of species by improving its natural ability to resist abrasive action.
This resistance is mainly governed by the particular nature of its anatomical structure, in
general the influence of a floor finish is superficial and not effective in depth. Careful and
regular maintenance will, however, retard the rate of surface wear of a timber, the degree of
retardation depending on the surface conditions and the type of finish used; in this respect
epoxy finishes are the most hard wearing.

10.5.4 Sound Insulation


(1)
Sound insulation is as much a matter of construction as of material Figure 2 gives typical
examples of floating floor. Construction intended for this purpose, however, the use of panel
flooring, e.g. wood chipboard as compared to using narrow floor boards will further help to
improve sound insulation. This is because of the reduction in the number of joints involved.
(2)

A heavy or dense panel product will provide better sound insulation than a light one.

10.5.5 Thermal Insulation


(1)
The thermal resistivity of wood varies with the species but ISofthe order of 7m2 K/W.
As a result wood materially reduces heat transfer through the whole floor construction, and thus
wood flooring should not be specified over an under floor heating installation without full prior
consultation with the floor supplier.
(2)
The law thermal capacity of wood provides a surface which is readily warmed and upon
which moisture vapour is unlikely to condense. Figure 3 shows typical ground floor
constructions having improved thermal insulation.

10.5.6 Colour Sensitivity


(l)

It should be born in mind that some timbers are sensitive to light which will affect the

colour of the wood.

144EBCS.51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 10: WOOD FLOORING BLOCKS

10.6

SELECTION

10.6.1 General
(1)
Careful consideration should be given to the selection of the form of the flooring,
whether board, strip, mosaic or panel products, and the performance factors, applicable to the
intended use should be considered.

10.6.2
I

Selection of Timber Species

10.6.2.1 Suitability for use


(1)
The hard woods and soft woods suitable for various applications are given in the
following tables based on the property of the species recommended.
(2)
They are recommended as having performance suited to use as flooring, mainly in wood
strip, board or wood block form but not as end grain blocks.
(3)
The list is not exhaustive and the omission of any particular species of timber does not
imply that it is necessanly unsuitable for flooring. At the same time the inclusion of a timber
in the list does not imply that it is always readily available on the market.
(4)
Those timbers mentioned as specially suited to particular conditions of service can be
used under other conditions, when they posses the necessary properties. Some species have
been included therefore in more than one group.
It should be appreciated, however, that the various timbers indicated as suitable for any
(5)
particular service conditions may not all be equally suitable in every respect.

(6)
The timbers listed are a selection only. Property requirements for each category of use
are given in Timber selection by properties.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995145

UTtLlZA TION OF TIMBER

Table 10.1

Movement
Classification

2
1
1
1
1

2
1

Timbers Suitable for Floors for Normal


Pedestrian Traffic

--

Timber
African Celtis. (celtis spp.)
Chlorophora Excelssa (Iroko)
Didspyros Abyssinica (Loko)
Oela Hochsteteria

(Damotweira)
Olea Welwitschii (Beha)
Hagenia Abyssinica (Kosso)
Juniperous Procera (Thid)

Density kg/m'
785 kg/m'
800 kg/m'
. 790-975kg.m3
900 kg/m'
850 kg/m'
650 kg/m'
700 kg/m'

Note: Normal pedestrian traffic is assumed to be intensities less than 2000 persons per day as
.experienced in large village halls and in large assembly halls". in school and college
classrooms; and in hospitals, hotels, canteens, offices, shops, etc.
Table 10.2 Timber Suitable for Floors for 'Light
Pedestrian Traffic
Movement
Classification
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
3

Timber
Saligna gun (Eucalyptus Saligna)
Pinus sylves tries
Podo carpus spp
Pinus radiata
Douglas fir (pseudotsuga taxifolia)
Ocotea kenyensis
' Aningerial Adolfi-fredereci
(Keraro)
Bosqueia Phoberous (Gebo)

Density
755 kg/m'
480 kg/m'
535" "
445" "
495" "
550" "
670 kg/m'
550 kg/m'

Note: Light pedestrian traffic is assumed to be intensities less than 500 persons per day as
experienced in domestic situations; small classrooms, small offices, small village halls
and small assembly rooms.

146

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

- --,--'-----'----

CHAPTER
10; WOOD FLOORING BLOCKS
\

Table 10.3 Timber Suitabl,e for


Movement
Classification
,

Decora~~ Floors

Timber

Density kg/m'

East African dive (olive hochstetteri)


Afromosia (Pericopsis elata)
European oak (Selected Quarter Sawn material)
Aningeria Adolfi-frederecii
Chlorophora Excellsa (lroko)
Mimusops Kummel

3
1
2
1
2
1

880 Kg/rrr'
735" "
705" "
670" "
650" "
890 kg/rn'

'.~

Note: A decorative floor is a floor selected for its appearance, bearing mind that the
species should be chosen according to duty requirements.

Table 10.4 Timbers Suitable for Heavy Duty Industrial Floors


Movement

Classification

Timber

Density kg/rn"

3
2
1
2
2
1
1

East African Olive (Olea hochsteteri)

Greenheart (Ocotea Rodiaei)

Junipers Procera (Thed)

Albiza Spp

Celtis Africana

,Apodytes Dimidiata
Blighia Unijugata

880 kg/rrr'
1040 kg/rn'
650 kg/m 3 : '

670
640
850
740

kg/m'
kg/rrr'
kg/m'
kg/m"

Note: Heavy duty industrial floors are assumed to withstand exceptionally


severe traffic including trucking and other impact loads as in
factories, mills, sortingsheds, workshops, ware houses etc.

ETHIOPIAN BUIL()ING CODE STANDARD


)

EBCS - 5 1995147

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER.

Table 10.5 Timbers Suitable for Floors with High Resistance to Chemicals and Acids.
Movement
Classification

Timber

Density kg/m'
"

Afrormosia (pericopsis elata)


East African Camphor Wood (Ocotea-usambarensis)
Chlorophora Excelsa (Iroko)
(Eucalyptus Marginata, (Jarrah)
Eucalyptus diversicolor (Karri)
Redwood/Scots pine (pinus Sylverstris)
Eucalyptus maculata (spotted gum)

1
1
1
1
2
3
2

735 kg/m'
595 kg/m'
655 kg/m'
865 kg/m'
915 kg/m'
480 kg/m'
960 kg/m'

Note: Floors with high resistance chemicals and acids are assumed to have an inherent
-resistance (i.e with not surface treatment). e.g floors in science laboratories.

Table 10.6 Timbers, Suitable for Floors with Small Movement for
Residential and other BUildings with Under Floor Heating
Movement
Classification
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note:

Timber

Density Kg/m'

,..
African mahogany (Khaya spp.)
Afrormosia (pericopsiselata)
Pygeum Africanum (Tikur inchet)
Juniperus Procera (Thed)
Chlorophora Excelsa
East African Camphorwood
(Ocotea Usamarensis)
Eucalyptus Camaldulensis (key-Beharzaf)

(1)

..

495
735
740
650
655

kg/m'
kg/rrr'
kg/m'
kg/m'
kg/m'

595 kg/m'
650 kg/m'

It is very important that further consideration must be given in the

future about panel products as a raw material for flooring. Such as


plywood, and block board, wood chip board, hard board, tempered hard
board with high density value about 960 kg/m"
(2)

It is also very important to classify timber for gymnasium floors,

ballroom floors, skating rink floors.

148

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

----~-~-----------~-------

CHAPTER 10: WOOD FLOORING BLOCKS

10.7

WOOD MOSAIC PARQUET FLOORING

10.7.1 Scope
(1)
This specification establishes requirements for three grades of mosaic parquet made from
fingers of wood intended to be bonded to a sub floor either directly or over an underlay.

10:7.2 Grade Descriptions

10.7.2.1 Grades of mosaicparquet


(l)

The three grades described in this specification shall be designated as follows:


SELECT GRADE

COMMERCIAL GRADE

INDUSTRIAL GRADE

10.7.2.2 All grades


(1)
All mosaic fingers shall be free from defects which may adversely affect their wearing
or bonding properties:
(a)

Imperfections on the back. Imperfection on the back shall be unlimited provided


that
no void or check is deeper than half the thickness of the finger,
(ii) the imperfections do not prevent the finger resiting firmly on the subfloor.
(iii) Imperfections on the edges and ends. Imperfection on the lower half of
each edge and end shall be permitted, provided that they do not affect the
bonding and stability of the mosaic finger.

(i)

(b)

Sapwood. Where light-coloured sapwood has not specifically been excluded by


the purchaser at the time of ordering, it shall be permitted. All sapwood shall
either be non-susceptible to or immunized against lyctus borer.

(c)

Variation in colour. Variations in the colour of mosaic fingers produced from the
same species of timber are normal and are permitted.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995149

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

. 10.7.2.3 Select grat!e


(1)
In select grade mosaic parquet, the wearing surface of the mosaic fingers shall be free
from decay, stain open checks, gum veins, borer holes and knots except as listed below. Sound
intergrown knots, forming part of the decorative feature of a timber species are not limited.
(2)

The following imperfections are permitted in up to 5 % of the mosaic fingers.


(a)

Closed checks-limited to three per finger

(b)

Hob nails

(c)

Chipped edges or sides not wider than Imm nor longer than 30mm

(d)

Tight gum veins lmm wide

(e)

Small imperfections not more than O.5mm deep or of type removed by sanding
the installed parquet are not limited in number.

10.7.2.4 Commercial grade


(1)
In commercial grade mosaic parquet, the wearing surface of the mosaic fingers shall be
free from imperfections as described in the select grade, except as listed below.
(a)

The following imperfections are admitted in upto 25 % of mosaic fingers.


Borer holes not exceeding 3mm diameter. The aggregate diameter of all.
borer holes shall not exceed 6mm per mosaic finger.
(ii) Tight gum veins, not wider than 3mm. The aggregate width of all gum
veins shall not exceed 6mm per mosaic finger.
(iii) Chipped edges or sides not wider than 2mm nor longer than 50mm.

(i)

(b)

The following imperfections are unlimited:


(i)

(ii)

150

Hob nails, closed checks, sound knots and stains.


Small defects not more than O.5mm deep or of a type removed by sanding
this installed parquet.

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

-~---~--------

- - - - - ---

CHAPTR 70: WOOD FLOORING BLOCKS

10.7.2.5 Industrial grade


(1)

Industrial grade mosaic parquet shall be unlimited in imperfections except that:


(i)
(ii)

Holes or voids shall not be greater than 5mm in the greatest dimension.
Gum veins or gaps shall not be wider than 4mm.

(a)

Thickness of Fingers:- The thickness of mosaic fingers shall not be less than
6mm, the preferred thickness is 8mm.

(b)

Toleraneese- Thickness of finger; The tolerance on the thickness of mosaic finger


shall be -O.3mm+O.7mm.

(c)

Mosaic Panele- The tolerance on the side of a mosaic panel shall be O.5 %.

10.7.3 Marking
(1)
Each package of mosaic parquet shall have the following information legibly and
indelibly marked thereon.
(i)

The
(ii) The
(iii) The
(iv) The
10.8

manufacturer name or trade mark.


standard trade common name of the timber species.
grade of mosaic parquet.:
area of coverage.

THE INSTALLATION OF WOOD MOSAIC PARQUET FLOORING


I_

'.,,",

10.8.1 Scope

(1)
This Code Standard sets out a recommended good practice in the installation wood
mosaic parquet flooring.
10.8.2 Dermitions
(1)

For the purpose of this standard the following definitions apply.


(a)

Subfloor: the base on which the wood mosaic parquet or an underlay is to be


laid.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995151

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

(b)

Underlay: a layer of sheet material fixed to a wooden subfloor, or a layer of


material spread upon a concret subfloorin a plastic condition to produce a plane
and smooth subfloor to which wood mosaic parquet is to bonded.

(c)

Steel trowel finish:-a concrete finish which has been firmly trowelled plane and
smooth.

10.8.3 Time of Installation


Before installation of wood mosaic parquet is commenced the following conditions shall
be met in the area to be covered.
(1)

(i)
(ii)
(iii)

(iv)
(v)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)

The subfloor is finished plane and smooth,


The sub floor and underlay have dried out.
All wet trades are completed.
All services are installed and in operation unless otherwise agreed between the
wood mosaic parquet laying sub-contractor and the contractor.
All windows are fitted and glazed
The interior of the room has dried out.
The building is weather sealed.
Adequate lighting and ventilation are provided.

10.8.4 Materials
10.8.4.1 Adhesives
The adhesives shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the wood mosaic parquet
or shall !peet the following requirements when tested in accordance with the procedures
described in Appendix "B" of this particular topic.
(1)

(a)

The adhesive shall be alkali resisting

(b)

Solvent and water content shall not exceed 40 %

(c) . Average shear strength obtained when cured shall be at least 1470 Kpa
(15rgf/cm 2) *
(d)

The adhesives shall have sufficient elasticity to withstand continuous expansion


and contraction of mosaic fingers.

152 EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

.
.
.
.. ----------'-_._--- -

CHAPTER 10: WOOD FLOORING BLOCKS

Note:

Wood mosaic parquet installed with and adhesive having a water content
higher than 40 % will ,expand excessivelyibecause of moisture absorption by
the mosaic fingers. After curing of the adhesive, such mosaic fingers will then
shrink. The adhesive must also have an aging characteristic consistent with
the expected life of the floor.

10.8.4.2 Underlay on wooden floors


(1)
Underlay for wooden floors shall be a sheet-material fixed to the subfloor, it shall be
capable of withstanding the stresses occurring through expansion and contraction of the mosaic
parquet installed thereon.
(2)
The moisture movement in any sheet underlay
material for a 4 % change. in moisture
/
content shall not exceed 2mm in 2.7m.
10.8.5

Wooden Sub Floors

10.8.5.1 Requirements
(1)

Wooden subfloors shall meet the following requirements.

(a)
(b)

(c)
(d)
(e)

Note:

....

>

.".

The subfloor shall be seas?ned timber _


The subfloor shall be of sound timber, tightly nailed to the joists with two nails
at each joist crossing in each floor board. It shall be plane and smooth, all nails
shall be punched below the surface.
The subfloor shall be basically sanded as that of interior wooden floors.
The under floor space shall be well ventilated.
In those~'a~es where the subfloor is excessively damaged or worn to an extend
that sanding does not bring all portions to a 'plane surface or there are gaps
between the floor boards exceeding 2mm or where it has been coated or
impregnated with a substance that may not be compatible with the adhesive, those
portions shall be cut out and replaced or the subfloor shall be covered with a
sheet underlay.
In cases where mosaic parquet flooring is installed directly onto th~
floorboards, it is recommended that if be laid diagonally to the joints between
the boards. This eliminates the possibility of joints in the mosaic parquet and
the subfloor coinciding. Moisture content at the time of installation of the
wood mosaic parquet flooring the moisture content of the wooden subfloor

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

153 .

-----

------"-- ---

r-'

U.TlLIZA
. TlON OF TIMBER
.

shall be between 8 and 15. %. The moisture content shall be determined by


the electrical method,

10.8.6 Structural Sheet Subfloors


0)

Plywood having a type A bond, and hardwood structural plywood may be used.

(2)
Sheets shall be laid with their.face, plies at right angles to the line of supporting-joists
and joints parallel to joists shall be staggered. Ends of sheets shall be butted centrally over
joists and edges of sheets, unless tongued arid groved shall be joined centrally over nogging
between joists. Such noggings, being of timber not less than 70mm by 35mm in section arid
:,~
set flush with the top of the joists.
(3)
Nails used for fixing the sheets to the joists shall be not less in length than 2.5 times the
thickness of the 'Sheet and shall be spaced as follows:

10.8.7

(a)

Flathead nail - 150mm centres along ends of sheets and 300mm centres alon~
edges.

(b)

Jolt (Bullet head nails - lOOmm centres along ends of sheets and 200mm centres
along edges.

Subfloor Preparation

10.8.7.1 General
The subfloor surface shall be sound, dry, cleanandfree from dust. lose material and
any other substance or condition which would affect the bonding of the mosaic parquet or
underlay.
'
(1)

10.8.7.2 Trowelled underlay


(1)
Underlay material to be trowelled shall be placed, spread, screened and steel trowelled
as recommended by its manufacturer to comply planeness of surface and its smoothness.

11.8.7.3 Sheet underlay laying and fixing


(1)

Sheet underlay shall be laid and fixed to wooden subfloors as follows:

154 EBCS - 5

1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 10: WOOD FLOORING BLOCKS

(a)

The underlay shall be laid with the sheets staggered in one direction. No gap
between sheets shall be more than 2mm wide. The sheets shall be bonded to the
subfloor with the same adhesives as recommended for the installation of mosaic
parquet. They shall also be nailed at lOOmm centres on all edges and 15 mm
away from the edges. The sheets shall be further nailed at intervals of 200mm
centre-to centre in each direction.

(b)

The nails shall be 1 inch x 14 gauge ring-grooved buttress nails (underlay nails)
or divergent point staples not less than 1 inch 2.54 em long.

(c)

Nails and staples shall be driven flush with or below the underlay surface.

(d)

The underlay may be lightly sanded at the joints to relieve discrepancies in height
or unevenness from nails or staples so that it will be plane and smooth surface.

(e)

The underlay shall be laid to within lOmm of all vertical surfaces to allow an
expansion gap .
."

10.8.8

Bond Surface for Mosaic Parquet


.i->

10.8.8.1

Cleanness of surface

(1)
The surface to which the mosaic parquet is to be bonded shall be free from all dust and
other lose material, and from any substance which would be deleterious to the bonding of the
mosaic parquet.
l~n.

10.8.8.2 Planeness of surface


When a straightedge 1.5m long is placed upon the surface at any position no part of the
surface shall be more than 6mm below the straightedge.

(1)

10.8.8.3 Smoothness of surface


(I)
When a straightedge 150mm long is place upon the surface at any position. no part of
the surface shall be more than Imm below the straightedge.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS.57995155

--_.-------

UTlLlZA TION OF TIMBER

10.9

INSTALLING MOSAIC PARQUET

19.9.1 Bonding
(1)

The mosaic parquet may be bonded to any subtloor referred to in number 3 below.

10.9.2 Compatibility of Adhesive


(1)
The subfloor surface 'shall not contain any material not compatible with the parquet
adhesive.

10.9.3 Adhesive
The adhesive shall be evenly spread, using a serrated or notched trowel. The serrations
should be a minimum of 3mm deep and at 6mm centres. The spread of adhesive may be
checked by the following method:
(1)

(2)
Place one mosaic parquet panel onto the spread adhesive and press down evenly all over.
Remove the panel immediately and if the adhesive is evenly distributed and 75 % of each
mosaic finger has made contact with the adhesive the spread shall be considered adequate.

10.9.4 Respread of Adhesive


When adhesive has set without being covered with mosaic parquet and installation is to
be resumed the hardened adhesive shall be cleaned off and fresh adhesive applied before laying
recommences.
(1)

..

10.9.5 Expansion Gaps

Expansion gaps shall be left at the junction of the mosaic parquet and fixed vertical
surfaces.
(1)

Note: Finishing:- Sanding and finishing of mosaic ,parquet shall not commence until the
adhesive has curied.

156

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

-~---_. ---------~

CHAPTER 10: WOOD FLOORING.BLOCKS


.

10.10

INSPECTION CONDITIONS

10.10.1

Inspection Rules

The inspection of the characteristics of mosaic parquet panels shall be carried out under
the conditions established below, on panels of a represeJ.ltative sample taken from the batch.
(1)

Batch

10.10.2

Unless otherwise agreed a batch is made up of mosaic parquet panels of the same wood
species, dimension of fingers (thickness, width, length) and grade, presented in a single
delivery.
(1)

10.10.}

Sample

(1)
A sample is made up of a number of panels taken at random from different parts of the
batch; the number of panels in a sample shall be at least that specified in the table below:
10.10.4

iJC,

Nature of Inspections

(1)
All mosaic parquet panels making up a sampleshall be inspected individually in respect
of the wood species, the nominal dimensions, the. defects and the appearance. The defects
permitted for each grade shall be inspected according t~ tIte relevant international standards for
the classification of mosaic parquet panels of different species of wood.
10.10.5

Moisture

(1)
The moisture content shall be checked on a test specimen cut from the middle of a finger
taken at random from every third panel, but at least on the three fingers, each taken from a
different panel. Unless otherwise agreed, the moisture content shall be determined with an
electrical contact device.
(2)

In case of disagreement, the gravimetric method shall be binding.

10.10.6

Dimensions

(1)
All inspections other than those for moisture content shall be carried out on all panels
of the sample.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS 5

1995157

UTlUZA7ION OF TIMBER

. (2)
. The dimensions shall be checked with measuring instruments capable for recording to
the prescribed. degree of accuracy.

The width and length shall be checked on the face parallel and perpendicular to the
(3)
longitudinal axis of the finger.
10~10.7

Defects and Appearance

The dimensions of measurable defects shall be measured with adequate measuring


instruments.

(1)

.(2}

Non-measurable defects and appearance shall be examined with the naked edge.

10.10.8

Acceptance and Rejection

(1)
If after. checking the characteristics other than the moisture content, the number of
rejected panels in the sample examined does not exceed the number shown in the third column
of Table 10.7 for the size of this sample the batch 'shall be regarded as complying with the
requirements of this Code Standard.
(2)
In other cases, the batch shall be rejected; a rejected batch may be presented, after
reclassification to a new check.
(3)

If the moisture content is not according to the specifications the batch shall be rejected.

Table 10.7 Number of panels in a sample

Size of batch

1
300 to 500
501 to 800
SOl to 1300
1301 to 3200
3201 to 800

IS8

Number of panels
initially subjected
to inspection (first
sample)

Number of rejected panels in the first


sample that decides

acceptance
of batch

rejection
of batch

Additional
sampling

3S

2
3
5
6
9

7
10
12
17
24

3 to 6
4 to 9
60 to 11
7 to 16
10 to 23

SO
75
100
150

EBCS- 57995

Size of
Additional batch

Number of rejected
panels in two samples
considered together that
decides
acceptance
of batch

rejection
of batch

70
100
150
200
300

6
9
11

7
10
12
17
24

16

23

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

"~-------

- - - - - - - - - - - - " - - - - - "- - - -

.CHAPTER'11
SCAFFOLD PLANKS

PAaT - I SOLID TIMBER SCAFFOLD PLANKS


11.1

SCOPE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

11~1.1

Scope of Section

(1)

This specification applies to softwood and hard wood solid timber scaffold planks.

(2)

The planks may be visually or mechanically stress .graded.

11.1.~ ~pplication

This specification for a scaffold plank shall consist of the general pr~vision in this
Section 11.1, together with the requirements in Sections 11.2, 11.3 and 11.4, as appropriate and
those of Section 11.5.
(1)

(2)
The purchaser when ordering to this specification shall stipulate which portions of the
specification are to apply.

11.1.3 Strength Requirement


(1)
The basis of the grade requirements of this specification is that scaffold planks shall be
deemed to have a strength not less than that of a -225mm x 40Qun plank of Fll stress grade
material or of a 225mm x 35mm plank of F17 stress grade material.

11.1.4 Defmitions

scaffold plank decking component of a working platform which is supported on (scaffold or


other suitable support.

arris

the edge where two faces meet.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - /;1995

159

-"----

""t .
UTIUZA TION OF TIMBER

arri easing

the removal of an arris equally on the meeting faces.

The width of plank

the thickness of plank.

11.1.5 Combinations of Imperfections


(I)
Imperfections permitted in a grade description (see Clauses 11.2.4 and 11.3.4) shall be
permitted in combination in that grade, provided the cumulative effect of the combination, as
assessed by visual grading does not exceed the effect of a single imperfection of the maximum
permissible size.
(2)
In cases of doubt as to the cumulative effect of a combination of imperfections the proof
tests given in Section 5 shall be applied to the plank. If the plank meets the test requirements
and passes the visual inspection requirements for mechanically stress graded planks (see Section
4) it shall be accepted.

11.1.6 Timber Species


(1)

The softwood and hard wood timbers acceptable under this specification are listed in
Appendix M. If a particular species is required this shall be stated when ordering the planks.
Species not listed may be used with the approval of the authorized institution.

11.1.7 Dimensions and Tolerances


(1)

Dimensions cited in this specification are the minimum acceptable when the moisture
content of the planks does not exceed IS % when determined with a correctly calibrated electric
moisture meter In accordance with all the relevant requirements.

11.1.8 Finish
The planks shall have a sawn finish surface. The.surface shall not be treated with paint
or other material which would obscure the grain, except that colour identification bands not
exceeding lOOmm wide may be painted on at positions commencing not more than 300mm from

(1)

the ends of the plank.

160

ESCS 6 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

----~----

CHAPTER 11: SCAFFOLD PLANKS

11.1.9 Branding
(1)
Scaffold planks purporting to comply with thisspeclflcation shall be bum-branded by
the manufacturer on the edges or other wise' permanently branded when approved by the
Authority.
(2)
The brand shall indicate the strength or "F"stress value of the timber species and shall
include .a letter to .denote visual graded or a letter to denote machine graded, and the
manufacturer's mark. The ciphers used shall be not Iess-man-zsmm high and the brands
shall be spaced not more than 1.8m apart.
11.2
.[

VISUALLY GRADED SOFIWOOD SCAFFOLD PLANKS

11.2.1 Scope ofSection


(1)

This Section applies to softwood scaffold planks at the time of grading.

11.2.2 Moisture Content


(1)

All Softwood scaffold planks shall be supplied at amoismre content not exceeding 15 %.

11.2.3 Dimensions
(1)

. The Cross-Sectional dimensions of the planks shall be not less than 225mmx4Omm thick

(see Clause 11.1.7).


11.2.4 Grade Description
Softwood planks supplied to the Fll stress grade shall be of sound,wood showing not
less than four growth rings per 25mm and shall be truly sawn. The timber shall be free from
compression failure, loose or encased knots and holes exceeding 20mm diameter, and pith, The
following imperfections shall be permitted:
(1)

(a)

Knots, wound and intergrown - not exceeding one-sixth the width of the face on
which they occur, and provided knots of maximum permissible size are spaced
not less than 450mm apart. Groups of small knots shall be permitted, provided .
the aggregate width of the group in any 450mm length of plank does not exceed
5Omm.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5

,!l95161

unUZA
, nON. OF TIMBER
.

.(b)

Slope of grain

no~

exceeding linl2 when measured over a distance of not less

_300mm;
(c)

Bow and Spring not exceeding 16mm in length of the plank.

(d)

Twist not exceeding the equivalent of 8mm in a 4.5m length of plank, as


follows.
Length of Plank: 4.5m 3.6m 2.7m 1. 8m.
Equivalent twist: 8mm 6mm 5mm 3mm

(~

End splits- not exceeding 150tpm


individually, and not more than one split at
.
each end.

(t)

Checks - not exceeding 300mm long and 3mm wide

(g)

Resin and bark pockets - not exceeding 300mm long and 3mm .wide,

(h)

Resign streaks - unlimited.

(i)

Want or Wane ~ not exceeding (W

+ T)/20mm on anyone edge or face.

11.3 VISUALLY GRADED HARDWOOD SCAFFOLD PLANKS


11.3.1 Scope of Section
(1)

This Section applies to hard wood scaffold planks at the time of visual grading..

11.3.2 Moisture Content


(1)
Planks of strength group S1 to S4 hardwoods (See Appendix M) may be supplied
unseasoned (See section 1.7).
(2)
Planks of strength group S5 S6 hardwoods shall be supplied at a moisture content not
exceeding 15 %.

162

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

-----~-----_.-

-_."-"-----

--~-------~--

CHAPTER 77: SCAFFOLD PLANKS

11.3.3 Dimensions
(1)
The cross-sectional dimensions of hardwood
planks at 15 % moisture content shall be
,I'
not less than the following (see Clause 11.1.7). \
-'..

",

Nominal Stress
Grade

Strength group
timber .

Width and thickness

Fll
F17

S5 & S6
SI to S4

225mmx4Omm
225mmx35mm

11.3.4 Grade Description


(1)
Hardwood planks supplied to this specification shall be of sound wood, and be truly
sawn. The timber shall be free from defective heart, compression failure, pin holes, loose knots
and holes exceeding 20mm diameter, group holes and borer holes, gum pockets, and decay.

(2)

The following imperfections shall be permitted:


(a)

Knots, sound intergrown - not exceeding one-sixth the width of the face on which
they occur, and provided knots of maximum permissible size are spaced not less
than 450mm apart.

(b)

Slope of grain - not exceeding 1 in


than 300mm.

(c)

Bow and Spring - not exceeding lfimm.in length of the plank.

(d)

Twist - not exceeding the equivalent of8mm in a 450mm length of plank, as

lfj when

,.
measured over a distance or not less

follows:
Length of plank: 4.5m
Equivalent twist 8mm
(e)
(t)
(g)
(h)

3.6m 2.7m 1.8m

6mm 5mm 3mm

End splits - not more than one at each end and not longer than 150nun.
Checks - not exceeding 300mm long and 3mm wide.
Tight gum veins - not extending from face to face, and aggregate length not
exceeding the length of the piece.
Want or Wane - not exceeding (W + T)/20mm on anyone edge or face.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS 6 7995163

_..

---~-_.

-"--_._ ..- - -

UTlUZA TION
OF TIMBER
.~

(i)

Sap wood:
(i)
(ii)

11.4

Non-susceptible to Lyctus borer - unlimited .


Susceptible to lyctus borer - provided the sapwood and wane combined
does not exceed (W + T)/2Omm on anyone edge or face.

MECHANICALLY STRESS GRADED SCAFFOLD PLANKS

11.4.1 Scope of Section


(1)
This Section specifies the moduli of elasticity and the visual grading requirements for
mechanically stress graded softwood and hard wood scaffold planks to ensure performance
comparable with that to be anticipated from planks visually graded in accordance with
Sections 11.2 and 11.3 of this specification.

11.4.2

Moisture Content

11.4.2.1 Fll s!reSl grade

(1)
Planks of Fl1 Stress Grade shall be supplied at a moisture content not exceeding 15 %
when tested by a correctly calibrated electric moisture meter.

11.4.2.2 F17 ,lrell grade


(I)

Planks of F17 Stress grade may be supplied seasoned or unseasoned.

11.4.3

Stiffness Requirement

11.4.3.1 PllInkl oJ Fll ,Ires. grade


(1)
When tested throughout its length over spans of 900mm, the minimum modulus of
elasticity of a plank of F 11 stress grade shall be not less than 7.6MPa.

11.4.3.2 PItmIu oJ F17 .trell grade


(1)

When tested throughout its length over spans of 900mm, the minimum modulus of

elasticity of a plank of FI7 Stress grade shall be not less than 7.6MPa.

164 EM:S. 6

,. .

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

.'
..

------'-------~

CHAPTER 11: SCAFFOLD PLANKS

11.4.4 Dimensions
(1)
The cross-sectional dimensions of mechanically stress graded planks shall be as specifiedin Clause 11.2.3 or 11.3.3, as appropriate.

11.4.5 Grading of Ends


As the end sections of planks cannot be effectively machine str.ess graded, they shall be
inspected to ensure that no imperfection, or combination of imperfections of worse appearance _.
than permitted elsewhere in the plank is present.
(1)

11.4.6 Visual Inspection


All mechanically stress graded planks, in addition to complying with all the appropriate
requirements of this Section 11.4 shall meet the following requirements.

(1)

11.5

(a)

Softwood and hardwood Fll stress grade planks-all the requirements of


Clause 11.2.4 except those in Clause 11.2.4.

(b)

Hardwood F17 stress grade planks - all the requirements of Clause 11.3.4 except
those in Clause 11.3.4 (i); Clause 11.3.4 (ii) if the planks are machine graded at
a- moisture content not exceeding 15 % and the slope of grain does not exceed 1
in 12.

PROOF TESTING

11.5.1 Scope of Section


(l)

This Section sets out procedure to be adopted where


(a)

there is disagreement on the results of grading of scaffold planks; and

(b)

experience indicates that serious defects that are difficult to detect by visual or
mechanical inspection may be present.

11.5.2 Criteria of Acceptance


(1)
During proof testing of a plank in accordance with Clause 11.5.3 there shall be no visual
or audible sign of distress of the plank.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995165

..

.' -_:-_--_._-----------------------

'

~~----------

UTiUZA nON OF TIMBER

11.$.3 Prooftests
NOte:. These tests should not be applied to ungraded planks as the severity of the tests may
damage faulty timber which would otherwise be usable for le~s exacting applications.

11.5.3.1 Static test


(1)
The plank shall be placed on supports spaced 1.8m apart with the worst visible defect
or the worst suspected defective area located at the centre of the span and on the tension side
(under side)of the plank. The plank shall then be loaded at the centre of the span with a mass
equivalent to a concentrated load of 300KN. applied gradually at an even rate, when so tested
the deflection of the plank shall not exceed the following:

Thickness of PI8nk Deflection


'30mm
35mm
40mm

63mm

60mm

42mm

11.5.3.2 . Dynamic test


The Plank shall be placed on supports spaced.304m apart with the worst visible defect
or the worst suspected defective area at the centre of the span and on the tension side (underside
of the plank).

(1)

(2)
A stop shall be placed under the plank at its mid-length to prevent the deflection or
displacement of the plank from exceeding 150mm measured from the underside of the plank.
(3)
The plank shall be loaded dynamically to cause it to deflect and touch the stop (e.g one
or two men jumping on the plank can be used for the load).
(4)
If the plank is required to be tested over a span less than 304m, it shall be tested over
either a 2.7m or a 2m span and the deflection stop shall be set at 95mm or 52mm respectively.

'166

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

,p

CHAPTER 77: SCAFFOLD PLANKS

PART D LAMINATED TIMBER SCAFFOLD PLANKS


SCOPE ~'GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

11.6

11.6.1 Scope
(1)
This specificMlonapplies to laminated softwood scaffold planks in which the laminations
are vertical and
be finger-jointed or scarf-jointed into necessary lengths.

may

11.6.2 Timber Species


",}_,

.I,

;,.

(1)

Any softwood species of timber acceptable for solid timber scaffold planks.

11.6.3I>eflmdtioDS
t.l, .
"

(1)
Adhesive spread - the mass of adhesive spread per uait area: e.g 23Kg per'l00m:2 of
joint area means that a quantity of23kg of adhesive is contained with a 100m2 of bond-line m;ea
bonding adjacent surfaces which total 200m2
(a)

Double spread - applications of adhesive to both .surfaces of a joint.

(b)

single spread-application of adhesive to one surface only of a joint.


the -surroundiag or prevailing temperature, e.g.
temperature.

assembly time

the time interval between.the commencement of the spreading of the


adhesive on the' pieces and the application of final pressure to the
entire assembly.

~?

~ient

ambient-temperature

(a)
'

air

Open assembly time - ' the time elapsed between the


commencement ,of ~preading of the adhesive and the
completion of the assembly of the laminations for bonding.

(b)

hOM tpUIlity

the time elapsed betw~n the


completion of the assembly'of the Iaminatioes'f or bonding and
, the application of the required pressure.

Oosed assembly' time -

the quality of the attachment between adhesive adherents.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 7995167

UTlLIZA nON OF TIMBER

cO".Jlete cure

the state of an adhesive when the physical and chemical changes


necessary to develop a bond are complete.

face-bonded assemblies two or more laminations bonded face to face.


lamintzlions

the individual lamina pieces making up a laminated scaffold plank.

percentage wood failure the area of ruptured wood fibres expressed as a percentage of the
total area of the ruptured bonded area under examination.
pre~s

time

the length of time joint must remain under pressure to acquire a


strength sufficient to allow handling of the assembly.

qU4llily control

a system where by the manufacturer assures that materials, methods,


workmanship, and the final product meet the requirements of this
specification..

treated timber

timber treated with preservative.

untreated timber

timber not treated with preservative.

vertical lamination

laminations with the bond lines perpendicular to the wide face of the

plank at the time' of bonding.


"

11.6.4 Moisture Content


...(1). The moisture content shall be determined with a correctly calibrated electric moisture
umeteein accordance with all-the requirements.

11.6.5 Dimensions and Tolerances


'j}

The cross-sectional dimensions of laminated scaffold planks shall be not less than
225mm x 38mm thick.

't(l)

11.7

MANUFACTURE

11.7.1 Grading of Laminae


(1)
All timber laminae shall comply with the requirements in clause 11.1.2 of Solid Wood
Scaffold, but the following restrictions shall also apply:

168

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTR 11: SCAFFOLD PLANKS

(a)

knots-not exceeding one-half of the width of the face on which they occur.

(b)

cupping of the lamina surface to be bonded - O.2mm maximum.

(c)

spring, bow - not exceeding 25mm in length of plank..

(d)

twist - not exceeding 6mm in length of plank.

(e)

slope of grain - not exceeding 1 in 10.

(f)

width of individuallaminal - measured on the 'face of the plank., not exceeding


38mm.

(2)
Each lamina may be the full length of the plank., or be finger-jointed or scarf-jointed,
provided the requirements of 11.7.2.3 or 11.7.2.4, as appropriate are complied with.

11.7.2

Manufacture

11.7.2.1 Surfaces for bonding


All surfaces of laminae to be bonded shall be clean, smooth and free from imperfections,
irregularities, loosely adhering particles, preservative salts, dust or contamination liable to
inhibit close and firm contact.
(l)

11.7.2.2 Storage time


The elapsed time between the preparation of a surface to be bonded and the bringing.
together and bonding of the surface shad not exceed 72h, provided that the prepared material
shall be stored in a place and manner that will maintain the moisture content of the material at
the desired level and ensure that the bond surfaces remain uncontaminated.
(l)

11.7.2.3 Finger-Jointing
Finger-joints, when used in laminae shall be made in clear timber, free from defects,
within 75mm of any joint, and shall comply with the requirements listed in Table 11.1 and
illustrated in Figure 11.l .
(1)

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5,1995

169

UTlUZA TION OF TIMBER

'fable 11.1.1 Finger-joint for Scaffold Planks


pin length
1

pin spacing

width of finger tip

38
32
25

12
9
8

3
2
2

.
L

r
't
-1- .
I
I
II
It.'

=fa

I,
w

--l

=
lenith of finfer.
=
pin spacin, distance between' fin,ers).

=
width of fIn,erups and roots.

== width of joint..

Figure 11.1 Finger Joint for ScafTold Planks


1 = length of finger
t = pin spacing (distance between fingers)
a = width of fingertips and roots
w = width of joint
Note:- other designs for finger..jointed lamina may be acceptable by the Authorities, provided
the finished bonded assembly has a strength not less than 75 % of the strength of the
clear timber.

11.7.1.4 Scarfjoints

170

(a)

No defect shall be permitted within 75mm of any scarf joint

(b)

The slope of the scarf shall not be steeper than 1 in 10m

(c)

when matching scarfs are brought together the surfaces of the scarfs shall be
in contact over the whole area of the scarfs.

EBCS 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

CHAPTER 11:. SCAFFOLD PLANKS

u.r,s

Adhesives and Adhesive. Spread

,.,

11.7.3.1 Type of adhesive


"It

q)

The adhesive used for the fabricating .of the planks shall be a waterproof type such as
phenol phenol resorcinol, or resorcinol.

11.'7.3.2 Use of adhesive'


(1)
The mixing time, the maximum and minimum intervals between mixing and spreading,
the maximum and minimum assembly periods, the pressure, and the curing conditions shall be
irt accordance with the reconunendations of the adhesive manufacturer.

11.7.3..3. Age of adhesjve.:


(1)
No adhesive shall be used after the age limit of the batch from which it came has
expired.

11.7.3.4 Adhesive spread


(1)
Where the adhesive manufacturerdoes not specify the adhesive spread for the bonding
of the planks, a minimum spread of 23kg per 100m2 Of bond shall be used.

11.7.3.5 Bonding ofpreservative treated laminae

...

(1)
Where the laminae to be bonded have been preservative treated the compatibility of the
adhesive to the preservative shall be adequately established.

11.7.4 As~embly
(1)

Joints and laminae. shall be assembled as follows:


(a)

previously end-jointed laminae shall have the surfaces which are to be Bonded,
machined or remachined before the laminae are bonded together.

(b)

Laminae in anyone plank may be mixed quarter sawn and backsawn, but a
fully back sawn lamina shall not be placed next to a fully quarter sawn Iamina.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5

19~5171

U'1IUZA TlON OF TIMBER


',l

(c)

The minimum spacing between tips of adjacent joints in adjoining laminae


shall be not less than 15Omm.
i.:

(d)

All surfaces to be bonded shall be double spread.

(e)

The bonding pressures shall be maintained on the joint for the full time
recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.

(f)

There shall be no voids in any bond zones in any assemble joint after release
of pressure and machining.

(g)

The cramping pressures shall be within the range of 500-700 KPa.

(h)

The temperature during curing of the glueline shall be not less than 200C when
the timber is untreated and not less than 60C when the timber is treated with
preservative.

11.7.5 Quality Control


(1)
The manufacturer of laminated scaffold planks shall institute and maintain an adequate
system of quality control to ensure the adequacy of the bonding of end joints and laminations.

'1

" lJ..:."

t.:

172

't".

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

.~-------'--

._._-.

CHAPTER

12

TIMBER FASTENER & CONNECTORS


12.1

MECHANICAL FASTENERS FOR STRUCTURAL TIMBER WORK

12.1.1 Scope
(1)
This Code Standard defines categories of metal fasteners for timber, specifies methods
of joint in corporating metal fasteners, and lays down procedures for the determination of basic
design infonnation applicable to timber joints in which the fasteners are incorporated.
12.1.2 Defmitions
(1)

For the purpose of this standard the following definitions apply:

(2)
FASTENER- a unit fastening device, together with other components such as nails and
bolts that may be required to enable a sound structural joint to be made between two or more
timber members, or between timber and members of other structural materials.
I

(3)
Category A Fasteners- fasteners such as nails, staples and screws which can be used
to construct a joint in which the fasteners may be subjected to either lateral or axial loading or
both (Figure 12.1).

i':;,'

_"w

''}'

,~

Figure 12.1 Catesory A Fasteners


ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS 6 1996173

.tlnUZA TlON OF TIMBER

(4)

Category B Fasteners - fasteners other than nails, staples or screws, acting as dowels
or the like capable of transferring load from the face of one joint memberto the face of another,
the two faces involved lying in planes parallel to one another (Figure 12.2). These fasteners
require to be set in predrilled holes or in precut grooves or, if toothed, to be placed between
.the members whieh are subsequently pressed together to effect the joint. Joints made with,.
special types of fasteners of this category almost invariably require a bolt to keep the members .
from moving apart from one another thus reducing the effectiveness of the fastener .

.+,

~I

Figure 12.2 Category B Fastener


Category C Fasteners - fasteners actingas gussetsor spliceplatescapable of transferring
load from the face of one member to the face of another., the two faces involved lying in the
same plane (Figure 12.3). Suchfasteners are usually."fflat steel plate either predrilled to allow
nails to be driven through them into the timber members, or with attached teeth formed from
the parent metal, the toothed plates beingpressed into the timbermembers to form the required
joint.
(S)

174 iscs. 6

1996
.,:,'

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

----

CHAPTPR
-- --- - --- 12: TIMBPR FASTENER-& CONNECTORS

12.1.3.2 Laterally loaded plain and improved nail

(1)
In joining steel plate to timber, head side dimension does not apply, 'pointside' rules
remainbut nails must fit tightly into the pre-formed holes in the steel. Square' shanks "fit" more
readily,
. .
Both length and diameter of nails are related to the thickness of the sheet material. This
r~lationship is established by extensive practical and laboratory testing in Wood Utilization and
Research Centre (WUARC), Addis Ababa.
(2)

End grain fixing is allowed for laterally loaded nails but 'permissible loads are reduced
-~o 0.7 times the side grain load. Loads for nails (except improved nails) in green timber and
In work which' will be exposed to the weather must be reduced by a- further 30 %.
(3)

12.1.3.3 Plain and improved nails-loaded in withdrawal


(1)
Permitted loads are given per unit length of point penetration into the holding member
so no <rule of thumb' size can be suggested. Nails used in withdrawal are not strong fixings
though improved nails have better performance and this allows the holding length to be reduced
by ~ fOr some uses such as flooring and roof decking.

(2)
'The permitted loads apply equally to both green and dry timber but have to be reduced
by 75 % for outdoor work where cyclic changes of moisture content can occur. Pre-bored
holes O. 8 times the nail diameter are necessary in very hard wood and allow a certain reduction
~f nail Spacings in various woods. In dry work (not Glulam) the most stringent requirement
IS a SpaCing of 20 nail diameters but this reduces to 10 diameters when pre-boring in certain
Woods.

12.1.3..4

Jointing of solid timber with plywood attached by nails or staples

(1)
A.n easy and effective means of jointing solid timber is by the use of plywood attached
With na-l
8 or staples. Structural components, such as trussed rafters,plywood web beams, ply
gUsseteq portals and stud walls sheathed with ply wood to provide wind resisting shear. walls,
are SoIU~ examples that exploit the advantages of nails or staple attachment.

:;2~

~lywood plates and gussets in frame works provide rigidity at joints and are capable of
emg de~igned to carry moments. and transfer shear and direct forces.

E;'-HIOP'~N BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995177

CHAPTER 12: TIMBER FASTENER &. CONNECTORS

"

Figure 12.3 Category, C Fastener


"

(6)
Category D Fasteners - fasteners acting as brackets capable of transferring load from the
face of one joint member to the face of another, the two faces involved usually lying in planes
at right angles to each other (Figure 12.4); Such fasteners are usually of steel plate preformed
to shape and predrilled to allow nails to be driven through them into the timber members.

'il'

Figure 12.4 Category D Fastener

1..2.1.3 Nails

C1)

There are very many varieties of shape and material, round plain wire nails are by for
the most commonly used fasteners for timber. Clout nails are simply large versions of round
~ire nails but, are often sold under end use names-slate nails, felt nails, plaster board nails,
~1:c. Lost head nails are also round wire nails but with small heads and their use is decided by
~isual requirements.

E:::THIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995175

_.

~._----- ------_.

..

----

-._.'-----~--

-----------------

CHAPTER 12: TIMBER FASTENER" CONNECTORS

"

Figure 12.3 Category C Fastener


(6)
Category D Fasteners - fasteners acting as brackets capable of transferring load from the
face of one joint member to the face of another, the two faces involved usually lying in planes
at right angles to each other (Figure 12.4); Such fasteners are usually of steel plate preformed
to shape and predrilled to allow nails to be driven through them into the timber members.

Figure 12.4 Category D Fastener


12.1.3 Nails
(1)
There are very many varieties of shape and material, round plain wire nails are by for
the most commonly used fasteners for timber. Clout nails are simply large versions of round
wire nails but, are often sold under end use names-slate nails, felt nails, plaster board nails,
etc. Lost head nails are also round wire nails but with small heads and their use is decided by
visual requirements.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995175

-------------

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

(2)
These wire nails are available with corrosion resistant coatings usually zinc based, hot
dipped zinc galvanizing gives protection superior to other methods of zinc application and has
a rougher surface finish which improves resistance to withdrawl as does a rust pitted surface.
(3)
Machine driven nails are mostly similar to round plain wire nails but the heads are
shaped to allow bandolier packaging and magazine loading.
(4)
Protectively coated nails are available but in less variety and excluding hot dipped
galvanizing. Most nailing machines are pneumatically operated. Some of them, when equipped
with specially hardened and tempered nails will fix timber to hard materials like brick and
stone.
(5)
The stem diameter of nails for machines rarely coincides with the diameters given in
tables used by designing engineers and this makes it necessary to work out appropriate new
loads and nail densities:- A simple and valid alternative is to design using the tables but taking
care to select values for nails of a smaller diameter than will actually be used in practice.
(6)
Square twisted nails, designed originally for special uses such as roofing, have proved
to be excellent for attaching perforated metal plates. AU the improved nails are good for
attaching plywood gussets and for fixing sheet materials to floors where they resist "popping"_
a problem which is often encountered with plain shank nails.
(7)
Cartridge pins have thick shafts compared with other nails. These are available in many
shapes, for varied fixing requirements, including threads and eyes. The pin match their specific
tool and are not interchangeable from one make or type of tool to another. Fasteners are of
steel specially hardened for the particular end use. The predominant uses are fixing to base
materials of masonry and structural steel. There is at least one-hand driving tool available
which fixes simple pins similar to the cartridge driven pin but of plain headed nails only.
(8)
Working loads for cartridge pins must be decided by the building designer; the usual
source of the basic data will be the preparatory manufacturer.

12.1.3.1 Length and diameter of steel nails


When joining solid timber to timber, the length of nails should be about 2.5 times the
thickness of the attached timber. The tabulated dimensions in 855268 part 2 (1984)
recommends about 2.33 times being the minimum requirement.

(1)

176

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

--------

--

CHAPTER 12: TIMBER FASTENER'& CONNECTORS

12.1.3.2 Laterally loaded plain and improved nail


(1)
In joining steel plate to timber, head side dimension does not apply, 'pointside' rules
remain but nails must fit tightly into the pre-formed holes in the steel. Square'shanks "fit" more
readily.
(2)
Both length and diameter of nails are related to the thickness of the sheet material. This
relationship is established by extensive practical and laboratory testing in Wood Utilization and
Research Centre (WUARC). Addis Ababa.

(3)

End grain fixing is allowed for laterally loaded nails but permissible loads are reduced
-to 0.7 times the side grain load. Loads for nails (except improved nails) in green timber and
in work which' will be exposed to the weather must be reduced by a' further 30 %.

12.1.3.3 Plain and improved nails-loaded in withdrawal


Permitted loads are given per unit length of point penetration into the holding member
so no 'rule of thumb' size can be suggested. Nails used in withdrawal are not strong fixings
though improved nails have better performance and this allows the holding length to be reduced
by % for some uses such as flooring and roof decking.
(1)'

(2)
The permitted loads apply equally to both green and dry timber but have to be reduced
by 75 % for outdoor work where cyclic changes of moisture content can occur. Pre-bored
holes 0.8 times the nail diameter are necessary in very hard wood and allow a certain reduction
of nail spacings in various woods. In dry work (not GIulam) the most stringent requirement
is a spacing of 20 nail diameters but this reduces to 10 diameters when pre-boring in certain
woods.
12~1.3.4

Jointing of solid timber with plywood attached by nails or staples

(1)
An easy and effective means of jointing solid timber is by the use of plywood attached
with nails or staples. Structural components, such as trussed rafters,plywood web beams, ply
gusseted portals and stud walls sheathed with ply wood to provide Wind resisting shear walls,
are some examples that exploit the advantages of nails or staple attachment.
(2)
Plywood plates and gussets in frame works provide rigidity at joints and are capable of
being designed to carry moments.and transfer shear and direct forces.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995177

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

(3)
Higher load transfers can often be achieved by nailing rather than by using glue, since
the strength of glued joints is limited by a low permissible shear stress in the ply lamination
(rolling shear stress). Other important features of nailed or stapled joints are that they can be
made' with less specialized labour and equipment than the glued type and they can be seen to
be effectively completed on inspection.

12.1.3.5 Nailing dense hard woods


(1)
It is often thought that structural joints cannot be made in dense timber such as green
heart unless the holes are predrilled. In fact pre-drilling can usually be eliminated as extremely
strong joints can be made by using plywood gussets nailed to the solid timber by small sized
nails. For example 12.5mm plywood may be fastened to green heart using a close pattern of
50mm long nails upto 3.35mm (10g) in diameter, and the joint design may be arranged so that
advantage is taken of this possibility to eliminate all pre-drilling.

12.2

STAPLES

(1)
The permissible lateral load per fastener may be calculated by the following method
given by the Princes Risborough Laboratory:
(2)
A staple may be assumed to have a value equal to that of a nail 1.5 times its diameter.
For example:- Assuming 50mmX1.59mm (16g) two leg wire staples in SC3 group timber, 1.5
times the diameter = 1.59mm X3/2 = 2.38mm
(3)
This is still less than the diameter of the smallest gauge nail so the permissible load for
a 2.64nun (12g) nail is reduced by a ratio of the diameter squared thus
2

2.38
2.64 2

0.813

(12.1)

(4)
In using the method described here, resistance to corrosion and fatigue should be
considered in comparison with that of the larger diameter equivalent nail. Also, for staples
driven into dense timbers the tensile strength of the staple could be the limiting factor and the
method given above is not appropriate.
(5)
In areas ,of doubt the manufacturers of the staple .should be consulted and permissible
load values should be based on evidence from test reports.

178

EBCS 61996

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

_._--_~._--_.

-_~_--~

__..

_-_~.-~_--

CHAPTER 12: TIMBER FASTENER & CONNECTORS

12.3

WOOD SCREWS

(1)
Screws .are available in as'many materials as nails and a rather greater number of shapes
and finishes, fncluding.plared decorative coatings.(See Figure 12.5)
(2)
When screws are used to fix steel plates' to timber the tabulated basic lateral loads may
be multiplied by 1.25 for fixing plywood special tables are presented giving factors to vary the
lateral load values according to the thickness of the plywood.
(3)
The rules of design for wood screws used in end grain and in wet timber are given and
follow along the same lines as set down for ring-shanked nails.

Headside
Timber. thickness

8~

8hnu~

@~

Point side
timber thic~ness

~@~

D~

Plain shank must penetrate


point side thickness for
screws under lateral load.

Figure 12.5 Wood Screws


(4)
Coach screws tend to be over looked as a rather old fashioned fixing but they are most
use full for fixing splice plates and 'Planting on' large timber sections with timber connectors
when required.
(5)
Some quarter of the length of the plain shank is the minimum that should enter the
"point" side timber. Basic lateral loads for a coach screw can generally be taken as those given
for bolts of like diameter with related thickness of timber, although there are small differences
alternatively.
(6)

The basic lateral load capacity is given by

P = Kd 2

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

(12.2)

EBCS - 5 1995179

UTlLlZA TION OF TIMBER

Where

P load in newtons

d diameter of Screw in mm

K constant for timber class and is

ScI and 2 = 14.5 Sc5


= 22.8

Sc3 and 4 = 18.6 Sc6 to 9 = 27.5

for sub-standard penetration the basic load must be reduced by the proportion of actual/standard
penetration. The standard penetration for screws and coach screws is the nominal diameter X

7.5 Withdrawal for coach screws can similarly, be calculated as it is for the code table of with
drawal values for smaller screws, given by

P = 16.3Gd 2
where

P load in newtons/mm of loaded threaded length

G Specific gravity of timber.

Sc 6 to 9 is taken as 0.60

Sc 5 as

0.51

Sc 3 and 4 as

0.42

0.34

Sc 1 and 2 as

12.4

(12.3)

WOODEN BOLTS

(1)

Ordinary mild steel bolts with hexagon heads and nuts are now universally used.
Carriage bolts, recognisable by their square heads and nuts and coarse buttress threads may be
met in existing work but in today's world they would be a 'special'.

Modern design has bolts

loaded in shear more than in tension so the strong buttress thread is no longer needed.
(2)
Coach bolts are quite unsuitable for timber engineering structurally designed applications
because of the in convenience of providing two differently sized washers for the same bolt one
washer has to slip over the square under the bolt head. In wood work the washers should be,
and frequently must be, larger than those generally mated and sold with a given bolt size.
(3)

The clamping effects of bolts and larger washers, obtainable at the time of installation,

might be thought to introduce additional load value available from friction between the timber
faces; in fact, there is no benefit because of recurring dimension changes in the timber due to
seasonal mistune constant changes and even thermal changes affecting the bolt length.
(4)
For these reasons loads on bolts are restricted to a relatively low level and thus
'connectors' are nearly always used with holts except in lightly loaded joints.

180

EBCS - 5 7995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

-----._-----------_ .._------------

CHAPTER 12: TIMBER FASTENER & CONNECTORS

(5)
Bolt holes should not be tight fitting. An allowance of 1.0mm is usual though more will
be required on bolts over 25mm diameter but the use of such size is rare. Tight holes may
precipitate splitting of the timber if it is not very dry at the time of installation.
(6)
The use-ofbolts (and toothed-plate timber connectors) in plywood often causes designers
some concern through uncertainty about how to apply, the following method is commonly used
and can be recommended. The example is included for the benefit of those who may find it
useful or who have not used the method before.
(7)
Let total thickness of plies be t) parallel to face grain and t2 perpendicular to face grain
select the basic loads for the bolt size, parallel and perpendicular to the grain, the thickness of
solid timber nearest to that of the plywood to be used. Then assuming that each ply will carry
load directly related to its thickness, take proportions of the basic loads for solid timber
according to the total thickness of the plies at the appropriate angle to the grain; and summate
them for the load direction required. Manufacturers' literature will provide the ply veneer
thicknesses.
As an example, consider MI2 bolts in 19mm 7ply, unsanded Douglas fir plywood (edge
distance 7 bolt diameters).
(8)

Basic loads for 19mm thick Sc4 timber

parallel to grain 1.27KN

Perpendicular to grain O. 706KN.

(9)

So for the plywoods:


for

=0" (load parallel to face grain)

Basic permissible load per bolt = t, x 1.27


19

t x 0.706
2
-19

t, = 2 x 2.5 + 2 x 3.2 = 11.4par = 11.4 x

\~7

(12.4)

+ 7.5 x

0.;~6

t2 =3 x2.5 =7.5perp =11.4 x 1.27 +7.5 x 0.706 =0.762 +0.279 = 1.04IKN (12.5)
19
19

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995181

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

Therefore, basic permissible load per bolt = t1 x 0.706 + t2 x 1.27

19
19

1104 x 0.706 + 7.5 x 1.27 =0.424 x0.50 = 0. 924KN


19
19
..
for

(12.5)

= 45 - By Hankinson's formula (using loads for total thickness of plywood)

Basic permissible load per bolt = 2 x 1.041 x 0.924 = 1.924 1.041 + 0.924
1.965 - lKN

(12.7)

10)
Suggested basic permissible load per M12 bolt in 19 mm thick 7ply, unsanded Douglas
fir plywood (at any angle to the face grain) = 1.00KN.
(11)

Also use the above method for toothed plate connectors.

(12)

Split ring and shear plate connectors used in plywood are often not satisfactory.

(13) Note that when loadsare parallel to the grain the permissible load for bolts through steel
plates may ~e increased by 25 %.
12.4.1 Timber Connectors Used with Bolts
(1)
Toothed plate connectors are shown in Figures 1004.1 and '2; they are available both
square and round in size of 38mm, 5Omm, or Slmm, 64mm and 76mm side or diameter.
12.4.2 Split-ring Connectors
(1)
Split-ring connectors are used in a similar way to double sided toothed-plate connectors
and use bolts and transfer loads from member to member of a joint in the same way but carry
very much greater loads (see Figure 12.6).

182

EBCS 6 1996

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

---------'-,_._._--

CHAPTER 12:
TIMBER FASTENER & CONNECTORS
-

Split-ring connector.
Can De parallel sided or
bevelled as shown

Cut away section


showing split-ring In
position in assembled joint
Special grooving tools are
available for forming the
precision groove!j in the timber

---

Figure 12.6 Split-Ring Connectors

12.4.3 Shear-plate Connectors


(1)
Shear-plate connectors are used in a similar way to single sided toothed-plate connectors
and _have bolts used and loaded in the same way but carry greater loads though not quite as
great as the loads related to split-ring connectors (Figure 12.7).
(2)
The following remarks apply to single and double sided toothed-plate, split-ring and
shear-plate connectors used with bolts. Holes in the timber for the bolts must always be not less
than 1mm larger than the bolt diameter. It follows that the bolt hole is not loaded in use.
(3)
Many texts quote test data for split-ring connectors which show that the connector
carries about 75 % of the load and the bolt about 25 % at the elastic limit.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995183

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

@@

67 mm dia.
(Pressed steel)
holed for M20 bolt

102 mm dia:
(Malleable iron)
holed for M20 bolt

Sheer plate connector


in a wood-to-metal joint
Joint with Shear Plate Connectors
Used back-to-beck in a
demountable unit

Figure 12.7 Shearplate Connectors


12.4.4

Timber Connectors of Sheet Metal

12.4.4.1 Punched metal plates


(1)
Punched metal plates (Figure 12.8) used in vast numbers are only suitable for installation
in a factory with special machinery employed under controlled conditions by fabricators who
normally hold manufacturers licences for the use of a particular plate. The plates are used in
structural components the design responsibility for which is usually carried by the plate
manufacturer.
(2)
The advantages lie in the formation of a joint of members all in the same plane and rapid
assembly line production of the structural components.

Figure 12.8 Punched Metal Plates

184

EBCS 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

1-:

--.. _---------

----_._

CHAPTER 12: TIMBER FASTENER& CONNECTORS

12.4.4.2 Hand-nail-plates
(1)
Hand-nail. plates (Figure 12.9) are not subject to the same proprietary restrictions. as
punched metal plates and are intended for use out of the factory needing only a hanuner or
mechanical hand nail gun to make fabrication possible. The structural components in which
they are used need not be dissimilar to those employing punched metal plates but design work
will be undertaken by an- engineer in the field and only sometimes by a nail-plate maker or
distributor.

Nail-plate or punched
metal plate for hand
nailing.

Figure 12.9 Hand-..mI Plates


12.4.5 Fastening for Wide Members
Wherever a timber is attached by more than one fastening in a row across the grain, it
can introduce a tendency for splitting to occur and this must be countered. An example is seen
in the use of punched metal plates which demand that the M.c of the timbers is adjusted before
jointing takes place M.c. has got a great effect therefore attention must be given.
(l)

(2)1'he diameter of fixing can also influence the splitting. The nails in (Figure 12.lOa )
will slip as shrinkage forces commence and before splitting occurs, while bolts in (Figure
12. lOb), or timber connectors on bolts, having a significantly greater bearing area on the
surrounding timber, will slip a smaller amount for a given load. It follows that for a given
shrinkage taking. place in a given space between two fixed points a bolted or connected joint
could show a wider split than a nailed joint because the latter 'will absorb more of the
movement. In Figure 12.10.b a split resulting from a given shrinkage would be only half as
wide as would appear at figure 12.1O.c where the fixed points are twice as far apart with the
same rate of movement the nails at Figure. 12.1O.d could cause three splits, each one about one

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995185

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

third as wide as the single split at Figure 12.1O.c this could mean that joint Figure 12.1O.d is
saved from rejection at inspection by having smaller shakes with sizes remaining with in the
limiting sizes of the grading rules appropriate to the design while joint Figure 12.1O.c contains
a shake outside the limits, thus there is some times an arguable case in favour of more smail
fasteners against fewer larger ones.
Splitting in joints where drying out has occurred subsequent to jointing.

c:2J

LU

o
o

I
I

( 1
o

o
o

o
E

A
nailed

B
bolted

C
bolted

D
nailed

Any fixing.
Members grain
parallel

Figure 12A-D: Fastening for Wide Members

186

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

--------

APPENDIX

CHARACTERISTICS AND MACHINING


PROPERTIES OF SOM.E OF THE.WELL KNOWN
AND COMMONLY UTILIZED ETHIOPIAN
TIMBERS

A.I

ALBIzIA SCmMPERIANA

Local name - Sessa(Amharic) Ambabessa (Oromo)

The wood - Sap wood pale yellow-white and heart wood brown possible to see the pores with
naked eye. (Density at green stage 880kg/m3 , at 12 % M.c. 530 kg1m3
Working properties:- It planes and saws easily but fibre tears while planing and sawing. It
holds screws and nails moderately but tends to split while nailing. It is not suitable for turning
and moulding.

A.2

ANINGERIA ADOLFI - FREDERECII

Local name - Keraro(common)


The wood - Sap wood and heart wood mostly undifferentiated and pale. white, pinkish colour
with wavy grain. Density at green stage 71Okg/m3 , at 12% M.C. 670 kg/m'.
Working Properties It works well both with hand and power tools, has got medium resistance
while cutting & ripping resulting with moderate blunting effect. Holds nails and screws very
well. Sometimes with lack of skill there will be a tendency to splite during nailing.
It has good quality adhesive bonding ability finishes to high quality indoor and external purpose
furniture. It is highly recommended for, bolted timber, veneer, boxes and crates, nailed joints,
packing blocks ship decking and bearing blocks.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5

199sA-l

-----'--------------

UTIUZA TION OF TIMBER

A.3

CHLOROPHORA EXCELLSSA (lROKO)

Local name - Dego (Anuak)

The Wood Sap wood yellowish- white and heart wood yellowish brown. It is possible to

see the pores (vessels) with naked eyes. Straight grain and fine texture.

Density at green stage 500kg/m3, at 12% M.e. 650 kg/nr',

Working properties - It planes and cut fairly and can be worked with hand tools.

While planing it contains torn grain which is not easy to remove by Sanding or any other

means. It has moderate blade blunting effect. Holds screw and nails properly provided care

has been taken to avoid splitage. Holds glue (adhesive) properly. It requires the application

of fillers before finishing takes place.

Recommended for - Ship building, railway sleepers, light flooring and with certain restriction

for sliced veneer production.

A.4

DIOSPYROS ABYSSINICA

Local name - Kuri (Amharic) Loko (Oromo)

The wood:- Sap to heart wood gray white. The grain is not straight but fine in texture.

Density at green stage 975 kg/rn', at 12% M.e. 780 kg/m'.

Working properties - It requires great effort in planning and cutting due to high resistance that

occurs in operation.

The end chars while cross cutting. splits while nailing. It is better to use bolt other than screw

and.nails for jointing this species. It bonds fairly with adhesives, and takes paint very well.

Reconunended for - Rail way sleepers and wedges, bearing blocks, flooring, bolted timbers,

shuttles and tool handles.

A.S

FAGAROPSIS ANGOLENSIS

Local name - Dero (Oromo) Sighilu, Sissa (Sidamo)

The Wood - Sapwood white-yellow; heart wood grey brown, but darkening on exposure.

Density at Green stage 815 kg/m' at 12% M.e. 700 kg/m'

Working properties- This specie retains slight saw mark, and it can be ripped and cross cut

easily. During planning it has slight blunting effect; apart from that it finishes well without

A-2

EBCS - 6 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

.-:_---"

_._._-

--
-~_---------------

"

APPENDIX A

any machining defect. It is easy for screwing and nailing with slight splitting effect while
nailing.
Recommended for flooring and quality furniture.

A.6

OCOTEA KENYANSIS

Local name - Soecho (Sidamo)

The wood - Is undifferentiated white, yellow brownish, fine texture.

Density:- at green stage 705kg/m 3 , at 12% M.C. 550 kg/m"

Working properties - It works well with hand tools and power tools, but the reduction of depth
of cut will result with smooth surface finish while planning. It has high quality adhesive
holding (bonding) capacity. It is very easy to drive in nails and screws which results with poor
holding ability of the specie.
Recommended for - light duty furniture, flooring interior and exterior joinery; in general light
construction purpose and good quality veneer.

A.7 PODO CARPUS GRACILIOR


Local name - Zigba (Amharic), Birberisa (Oromo)

The wood - The colour is usually uniform, tight yellowish, brown through out with no clear

distinction between heart wood and sap wood". Straight grained, fine even texture.

Density at green stage 735 kg/m", at 12% M.C. 530 kg/m',

Working properties - Saws and ripps very well with a very low resistance, slight saw marks

and blunting effect. It planes well, It holds nails and screws with minor splitting effect and

has good bonding property.

It contains minor torn grain while planning and chip marks which can be removed by sanding,

takes finishing material properly and high quality painting (varnishing).

Recommended for - Joinery, bolted timbers, boxes, and crates nailed joints, matche boxes.

A.8 JUNIPERUS PROCERRA


Local name - Thid (Common)

The wood - The sap wood is light red and heart wood is red, It has very fine texture.

Working properties - Saws and planes easily with hand tools and machines.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995 A-3

_._.:.---_.~~--

--

_.

_._----_..:_~~----------~---

.-~-

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

Holds poorly nails and screws with splitting effect;


has moderate gluing property and
It can be finished satisfactorily.
Recommended for - for building construction studs (poles), flooring, purline, doors and window
manufacturing, roof shingles, pencils.

A.9

POLYSCIAS FERRAGINEA

Local name - Zengerow Wenber (Sidamo)


The wood - Undifferentiated sapwood and heartwood white to light yellow brown in colour,
very soft and light but tough and strong.
Density - at green stage 530kg/m3 , at 12 % M.C 440kg/m3
Working properties: - It has a very good cutting and ripping properties with very low resistance
and no burning effect. It retains slight saw marks, planes very well and, bonds well with
adhesives, no split during nailing and screwing but because of its softness it does not hold nails
or screws firmly.
Recommendation - Suitable for boxes and crates, inner layer.of plywood, simple furniture and
hollow board construction.
A.tO

PYGEUM AFRICANUM

Local name -

Tikur-Inchet (Amharic)

The wood - Sapwood pale-pink, heartwood pale-red turning to dark-red, moderately hard and
heavy. Distinct growth rings stem straight or interlocked grain.
Density - at green state 990kg/m' at 12 % M.C 860kg/m 3
Working properties - Works easily and cleanly by machine or handtools planes well without
tearing but tends to blunt cutters; recesses and turns cleanly, slight chip-marks and tom-grain
may appear, during planning; difficult to nail due to its hardness .and tendency to split, requires
preborring in screwing. Fair in gluing, takes a high polish without filling.

A-4

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

'11- -

- ' ._-------~-~,- - - - - - - - - -~--~~----

-.---.-------....
-.-._---

._~----------

APPENOIX A

Recommendation - Highly recommended for heavy duty construction work, suitable for strong
furniture, window and door frames, can be used for bearing blocks, beams and joints, bolted
timber, columns, posts, and roof truss members. It can aliso be used for railway sleepers, boat
construction and lorry bodies.

A.ll

MIMUSOPS KUMMEL

Local name:- Kolati. (Amharic)

The wood - Wood Undifferentiated, redish-grey to brown with fine texture, hard and heavy.

Density:- at green stage 1040kg/m3 at 12% M.e 890kg/m 3

Working properties - Hard and strong for cutting and ripping and highly resistance in planning.

Difficult to drive in nails and screws.

Recommendation for use:- It is recommended for columns and posts, boat building, tool

handles and rail way sleepers.

A.12 APODYTES DIMIDIATA


Local name: Cheleleka:- (Oromo)
The wood - Sapwood and heartwood are not clearly defined. The wood is whitish to light
brown when freshly cut, turning greyish-brown later on, hard and moderately heavy.

Density:- at green stage 940 kg/m'; (at 12% M.C) 710 kg/m'.

Working properties:- Highly .resistance during cross cutting and ripping and slight blunting

effect on cutting-tools; planes to a smooth surface, shows chip marks. It holds nails
satisfactorily but tends to to split during nailing, hence pre boring is necessary for screwing.
It has a good property in turning and sanding.
Recommendation - Suitable for inrerior carpentry, furniture and construction.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 5 1995

A-5

"'---

~~~-----~~-

UTILIZA TION DF TIMBER

A.I3

CELTIS KRAUSSIANA (CELTIS AFRICANA)

Local name - Kaout, Amala ka (Amharic).


The wood - Sapwood and heart wood not distinct unless there is a faulty heartwood. Wood
yellowish-white to greyish in colour with slight wavy grain, when the heart wood is faulty it
turns to dark brown; hard and heavy.
Density - Green stage 101Okg/m3 at 12% M.C.nOkg/m3
Working properties - It is moderately resistant in cutting operations, planes well with a slight
defect of torn grain, Wooly grain and chip marks. At the false heartwood side it shows a
spiral' grain. It nails easily but tends to split, thinner sizes should be prebored for screwing,
generally it is preferable to use screws than nails. It has good gluing and staining properties.
It takes a very high polish with out the application of fillers.
Recommendation: - It is recommended for structural works, particularly where high impact
loads are expected,. for heavy duty, crates, boxes, for tool handles, joinery and plywood
manufacturing;

A-6

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

11

"
"

APPENDIX

PLUGGING KNOT AND CONE HOLES

'\\

B.1

METHODS

The following methods of plugging shall be considered satisfactory if carried out with
seasoned material in accordance with paragraph B2.

(1)

(a)

Driven plug (see paragraph B2 0), (ii), (iv) to (vii).

(b)

Machine- inserted plug (see paragraph A2 (i) to (vii).

(c)

Hard-setting filling (see paragraph B2 (viii).

B.2

REQUIREMENTS

(1)

The following requirements shall be observed:


(a)

The maximum size of the plug shall be 16mm diameter for a driven plug and
38mm diameter for a machine inserted plug.

(b)

A driven plug shall be not less than three-quarter of the depth of the board and
shall not extend through the board.
A machine-inserted plug shall be not less than 12mm and not more than three
quarters of the depth of the board.

(c)

A machine-inserted plug shall be at least 30 % greater in diameter than the hole


to be plugged.

(d)

The grain of the plug should be in the same direction as the grain of the board.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD.

EBCS - 5 7!!95

B-1

,UTILIZATION OF TIMBER

Table C3 Properties of Structural Timbers


Strength group

St~dard and

'Local
common name of
, Ethiopian Timber

Lyctus
susceptibility

, Durability
Classification
fungi &
termites

Shrinkage

Density
at 12%

M.e.

Green

Seasoned

Iron Bark
(Tileur inchet)

Sl

SDI

920

Iroko (Dego)

S2

SD3

480

Mahogany red

S2

SD3

960

Karri

S3

SD2

900

Oak, Silky

S6

SD7

Sf

530

Walnut(yellow)

S4

SD5

Sf

670

Olea (Weira)

Sl

SDI

900

Meranti-Light-red

S6

SD7

640

Kg.m'

Note:
S
R

1
2
3
4

C-2

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Susceptible
high shrinkage (over 8 %)

Resistant
medium shrinkage (5 to 8 %)

highly durable
Low shrinkage (lessthan 5 %)

durable
wide sapwood.

moderately durable

nondurable

EBCS - 51995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

D:

APPENDIX

ILLUSTRATIONS OF IMPERFECTIONS

Sizeof gum pocket

--

,,'" .....z-:

",/",""

GUM POCKETS AND VEINS

(a) General slope measured

a: b

=S
.Fig. 02. SIZE OF

Size ofInternal check

INTERNAL CHECKS

Fig. 1)1. SLOPE

=S

Fig. 04.

.-.~

(b) Slope

or gum vein

A
ROUND
8 = OVAL
C = SPIKE OR ARRIS
SI1;E = X

a:b

OF

Fig.!~

GRAIN

KNOTS

Arris
HlorlwODd

Wont

Fig.~.

--.............

WANT, WANE AND SAPWOOD

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

Fi~. D6

EBCS - 5 1995

D-l

Ol:lttONttJ..S 300:J 9NI07JnS NttldOIHJ..3

966L 9 - S.:JS3

l-<I

[:xNV'1R .L!I3:'1 X'1'1VNOI.LN3:~NI 3DVd SIHJ..]

1:138WIJ.. :/0 NOIJ..

vznun

I---~

.....

--------'-._---

APPENDIX

.DETERMINATION OF APPARENT MODULUS


OF ELASTICITY AS A PLANK
~l

SCOPE

E1.1 This non-destructive method provides a means of determining the apparent modulus of
elasticity of timber.
E2

PRINCIPLE

E2.1 Deflections of a test piece under load conditions identical to those of a stress grading
machine are measured and 'the modulus of elasticity is calculated and expressed in GPa.
E3

APPLICATION

E3.1 The method is intended for use in testing quality control test specimens of mechanically
stress graded timber.
E4

APPARATUS

E4.1 A testing machine a capable of measuring failing loads with an accuracy of 1 % or


O.5kg.
E.4.2 A linear measuring device capable of measuring to O.OInun.
ES

TEST SPECIMEN

ES.1 The test specimen shall conform to the requirements of quality assurance of mechanically
stress graded timber .
. E6
E6.1

PROCEDURE
Determine slope versus deflection curve (see Figure E2) as follows.
(a)

Eliminate possible zero errors by applying an initial load, WI, on the test piece
not exceeding 10% of the load applied during grading, W.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 51995

E-l

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

Measure the deflection, AI, to an accuracy of O.OSmm and record.


(b)

Apply the final load, W2, to the test piece equal to" the load applied during
grading, plus the hiitial load, WI.

(c)

The difference between the deflection, A2 - Al

Note- A corresponds to the deflection due to the load W which can directly
correlate with the deflection range .indicated by the machine.
Thus if WI
W2
W
W2

= initial load

= finalload

= load used during grading

then
or

where

WI ~ O.IW

.,

= W+ WI

=W2 - WI

E7

CALCULATION

E7.1

The modulus of elasticity, E, shall be calculated as follows (see also Figure EI):

E=...-X

4bt

(W) GPa

lOOOA

Where L grading machine span = 914.4mm.

b breadth in millimetres measured to O.05mm precision.

t depth in millimetres measured to O.05mm precision.

W load used during grading, in newtons.

A deflection in millimetres.

Note:

ES

(w)

= the slope of the load versus deflection' curve in range of

proportionality as shown in figure E2

REPORT

ES.l. Report the modulus of elasticity of the test piece in GPa and the net deflection in
millimetres to an accuracy of O.05mm.

E-2

ESC$.. - 5, 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

APP~NDIX E

~
-

Face colour marked by


machine stress grader

K:::.:

\JL

I~I ~
-,-;

PosItion of lowest
stiffness zone or
obvious defect

Figure El Detennination of Apparent Modulus of Elasticity

""

Proportional limit

c
.5

~
~
OtllecUon In mllllmetres

Figure E2 Curve of Load V. Deflection

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS 5 7995 E-3

---_.:---------- --------

UTlLlZA TION OF TIMBER

[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

E-4

EBCS 61996

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

~. --_._-------~

----"------_:_- ----- ---"."-

APPENDIX

'F

SELECTION OF VERIFICATION STICKS

Fl

PROCEDURES

Ft.l

Verification sticks shall be selected according to the following procedures:


(a)

Where the verification stick is composed of timber, obtain a quantity. of timber


preferably machined to the same size as the timber to be graded, of which the
moisture content shall be as close as possible to the mean equilibriwn moisture
content that the sticks will attain in service.

(b)

Check that the stress, grading machine is operating correctly by using


an existing
.
grading programme and verification sticks. Set up the machine for the
programme and size of timber for which the verification sticks are required.

(c)

Pass the dry machined timber through the. grading machine as for a normal
production run and select those pieces which' appear to have acceptable stiffness
profiles for verification sticks. These must show a small proportion of their
length changing from one grade to another and back to the original grade. The
change in grade may occur anywhere along the length. When available attach an
interface unit and teletype to the stress grading machine to obtain a continuous
printout of the deflection along the length of each piece.

(d)

Test each potential verification stick in the laboratory at each point tested by the
grading machine to obtain a stiffness profile. An acceptable stiffness profile of
verification stick shall be one which passes through at least one grade boundary
and has at least two grade points with a modulus of elasticity as a plank values
corresponding to either (a) one to three deflection units greater than the number
of deflection units at the grade boundary. or (b) two to four deflection units at the
grade boundary. Both types of stiffness profile shall be represented in the
verification sticks for each grading programme (see Figures F{ (a) and (b) for' two
acceptable stiffness profiles).

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - 61996

F-l

UT/lIZA
. , TION OF TIMBER

(e)

If a particular stick misgrades by one grade up or down and all of the other
verification sticks (including sticks of the same grade as the questionable stick)
for the particular programme grade correctly, then it is possible, that the stick
needs to be replaced. A quick check can be made on the stick by grading it at
either slightly lower pressures (say 10%), if it is down graded, or slightly higher
pressure (say + lO%},it is upgraded, to check if the correct grade is achieved.
If the 10% variation in pressure results in the correct grade then the stick should
be replaced.
,

If the pressure has to be varied by more than 10 % and there are no sticks
available for the same grade and programme, then the machine should be checked
fully, that is computer, pressure gauge, transducer units and so on.

!p

Fig.

'Flta)

. .
Grade,Iiloundary

Graded point

Ep

Grade boundary

Figure Fl ACceptable ~ Promes

F-2

EBCS- 5,1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING' CODE-6TANDARD

APPENDIX F

Ep

.. .
Grade boundary

Graded point

Figure F2 Unacceptable StifYeness Profile

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

"

EBCS - 5 1995

F-3

OI:l~ON~.LS 300~

DNI07JnB N~ltlOIH.L3

96619 - S~B3 t-~

[}INV'IU U3:'I A'I'IVNOI.LN3.LNI 3DVd SIH.L]

1:13BWI.L :/0 NOl1t1ZnUn

-_._.

---_._---~--_.--~-_.-

.;.

APPENDIXG
METRIC STRESS GRADE DESIGNATIONS AND'
BASIC WORK'ING STRESS IN BENDING'

I
I

Metric stress grade


designation

Basic Working Stress in bending


MPa

F2

2.8

F3
F4
F5
F7
F8

3.4
4.3

5.S
6.9

F22
F27

8.6
11.0
14'.0
17-.0
22.,0 .
27.S,

F34

.34.5

Fll
F14
F17

"

i:

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS - S

199sG-l

OlJflONfI.LS 300:J fJNI07/nS NtlkJOIH.L3

9661.

s - S:JB3

,..,n

[XNV'1H .uI3:'1 A'1'1VNOIJ..N31NI ]:DVd SIRL]

./

1J3tlWu.:/0 NOli. vmun

-_._---_.- - - - - - -

APPENDIX

STORAGE AND HANDLING OF TIMBER


HI

GENERAL

When properly used, timber is one of the most robust, durable and easily handled of all
building materials, but like any other structural component, it can be seriously damaged by
abuse, especially careless or improper exposure to wetting or drying, or both.
(1)

A reputable supplier can be expected to deliver timber building components to the site
inI the optimum condition
suited to their end use. It then become the responsibility of the
_
builder to ensure that the material remains in this condition. The information given in this
Appendix is furnished for his assistance.
(2)

02

FRAMING TIMBERS

Hi.l.\ Unseasoned Framing Material


Generally hardwood timbers are built into-the building 'frame in an unseasoned condition
inorder to take advantage of the facility with which such material can be worked. It is
important that unseasoned timber delivered to the.building site be maintained in this state until
erection.
..

(1)

),

..

The simplest means of substantially retarding drying is to block stack the timber and,
since uneven drying may produce distortion an(r cracking, particular care should be taken to
avoid projecting the ends of 'pieces beyond theends of stacks. Stacks, including the ends,
should be covered with impervious sheeting to reduce the rate of evaporation and to provide
protection from the heat of the sun.
.

(2)

.-f"

Unseasoned hard woods are generally not unduly affected if properly stacked on the
ground for a short period, provided the site is reasonably level so that distortion of the timber
does not occur. However, it is desirable to have impervious sheeting under the stack to protect
the lower timbers from dirt and stains.
(3)

02.2 Seasoned Framing Material


Some framing material is seasoned before delivery and is intended for use in this
condition; it is necessary to protect this material from wetting on the site. It should be block

(1)

ETHIOPIAN BUILDjNG CODE STANDARD

~ ".

EBCS.57995H-l

UTILIZATION OF TIMBER

stacked and covered, as for unseasoned material, but it should not be allowed to come into
contact with the ground.
(2)
The stacking area should be cleared of long grass, and stacks should be supported at
least" ISOmm off the ground by rails.
(3)
Alternatively, they may be placed on the ground on impervious sheet, provided water
cannot flow on the sheet from the sides or ends or collect on it as a result of rain.

H3

FLOORING, CLADDING AND MOULDINGS

(1)
flooring, cladding and mouldings are normally supplied in the seasoned condition.
Considerable care and expense has usually been incurred in drying the material to a
. predetermined optimum moisture content, and machining it accurately to profile. It should
therefore be graded as a valuable material which demands the utmost care and protection when
on-site. Delivery of these items should be delayed, where possible, until they can be
immediately built in. This requires an accurate scheduling of job times by builders, but the
additional planning will be amply rewarded by improved performance of materials, and reduced
risk of demand on the builder to " make good."
(2)
Immediately upon delivery to the site, flooring, cladding and moulding should be block
stacked on a flat surface at least lSOmm off the ground and on rails no further than 4SOmm
apart.. Stacks should be well covered by impervious sheets to ensure maximym protection from
both rain and sun and these sheets should not reach below the bottom of stacks,
(3)
When flooring or cladding is required to be delivered to the site unseasoned, as is often
the case with cypress pine, the precaution described above for unseasoned framing material
should be adopted.
(4) . However, if it is desired to achieve a degree of drying before installation, the material
should be stacked in such a manner that each board is uniformly.exposed to air circulation and
is restrained from deformation. The practice of laying flooring face downward on the joists for
a period before fixing may be employed, provided it is not subject to damage by operations of
other trades.

H4

JOINERY

(1)
Items of joinery delivered to the site should be stored well off the ground in a weather
proof building or under the cover of the progressing building, and should be carefully protected
from exposure to rain or sun before fixing.
(2)

B-2

Exterior joinery should be primed (pigmented or clear) on all sides before fixing.
EBCS 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

APPENDIX H

(3)

'Painting or clear finishing should follow as soon as possible after fi::lcing..

,Note: It is emphasized that it is good practice for all types of timber, seasoned or green, to be
bundled or stackedvand covered when delivered to the site, this doesnot absolve the'
builder from the responsibility of eit~er maintairiing protection or of providing it when
necessary.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING. CODE STANDARD

:,i.

EBCS -

5/995H-3

al/~aN~.J.S

saoo fJNla7JnS

N~ItlOIH.J.3

<, \

('}INV'IU U3'I A'I'IVNOIJ..N3.LNI 3DVd SIRL]

IIi/BWI.J. :/0 NOll tlZl7un .

--

-----

---_._~------

._---------

/:

APPENDIX

SITE PREPARATION
a.r

GENERAL

(1)
The advice given in this Appendix has as its aim the creation of an awareness of the vital
influence which certain site factors can have on the satisfactory performance of the finished
structure.

J.2

SITE DRAINAGE

(1)
Surface and sub-surface water occurring on the building site from whatever source
should be diverted from flowing under the structure so that the area beneath it will remain dry.
Ponding of water under the structure due to the natural configuration of the ground surface or
the danming effect of footings or walls should be prevented by the provision of drainage or
diversion channels, regarding of the ground surface or providing openings in Walls where
necessary.
(2)
Failure to observe these precautions may result in settlement and cracking of walling,
rotting and distortion of structural timbers and creation of conditions conducive to fungal and
insect attack.
.
(3)
The layout of stonnwater drains and soakage pits (where required) should be in
conformity with the requirements of the appropriate Building Authority, and where provisions
must be made on the site for the disposal of domestic sludge or effluent from septic tanks.

J.3

DEAD TREES, TREE STUMPS AND WOOD DEBRIS

(1)
All dead trees, tree stumps and other wood debris, including waste material from the
construction, which might harbour termites should be removed from areas to be covered by the
building, and cleared back for at least 3m from the building or to the property boundaries if less
than 3m distant. Particular care must be taken to remove all timber off cuts and debris from
the sub-floor space before the flooring is completed if it is not practicable to do so afterwards.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS5 1995

J-l

\~

966t 9 . S:lS3

OlJtlONtlJ.S 300:J DN/07InS NtI/dO/H.l3

llllir

Off 0

[:>mVrJUU3:'l A'l'lVNOI.LNaiNI ~DVd SIRL]

",

'<_

0 :

ttznun

1I39W/J. :/0 NO/J.

_ _ _

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 0.0

~_O

~----

- ---~------------- -------

APPENDIX

-.~~

LYCTID SUSCEPTIBILITY, DURAt~ILITY,IN


GROUND CONTA.CT, SHRINKAGE AND
DENSITY OF SOME COMMON STRUCTURAL .
TIMBERS
;;j

Standard local
name

Lyctus
Susceptibility

Durability Class(fungal
and termites) ground
contact

Shrinkage

density Kg/m' at 12 %
moisture content

L
L
M
M
M
L
M
L
L
M
M
M
L

860
950
650
670
530
670
620
560
770
700
540
720
540

.>

Tikurinchet
Weira
Dego
Keraro
Zigba
Kosso
Wanza
Thid
Kaout
Dero
Bessana
Nech Beharzaf
Pine radiata

R
I

I .

2
1
2
3

R
R

S
R
S
I
R
R
R
I
I

2
4
1
2
3
4
1
4

Note: .S = Susceptible
H = High shrinkage (over8 %)
R = rarely susceptible M = meduimu shrinkage (5 to 8 %)
I = Immune
L = Low shrinkage (lessthan 5 %)

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODe STANDARD

\;

EBCS - 51995K:..l

UTlUZA TlON OF.TlMBER

values are for tangeiltial.shrinkage from green to 12%M.C.

1 = highly durable

'2 . = durable

,. 3 . = moderately durable

4 -non-durable

s~ies listed in twoclasses are either very variable or intermediate between the two
classes. DUrability applies only to heartwood; sapwood of all species is non-durable.
Durability' is rated' on ground-contact conditions ~

K-2

EBCS - 5 1995

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE StANDARD

------

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - '
-----~---~
..

APPENDIX

PRECAUTIONS AGAINST WIND EFFECTS ON


TIMBER-FRAMED STRUCTURES

L.1

GENERAL

(1)
No simple set of rules can be given which will specify all of the measures which should
be taken to avoid wind damage in particular geographic areas or' for particular sites.
(2)
Attention to security of fastenings of framing members and roof cladding elements, and
the shuttering of window openings where subject to damage by wind-driven debris will, under
all but the most exceptional wind forces, provide a satisfactory degree of security.
(3)
It must be emphasized, however, that a structure need not be located in cyclonic or high
wind area to require particular attention being paid to the likely effects of wind.. It is a matter
of record that many houses and other structures have been unroofed at only moderate wind
speeds because of inadequate fastenings.

L.2

WIND EFFECTS

'Wind pressure is proportional to the square of the wind velocity on a 'flat surface
exposed at right angles to the direction of the wind, the equivalent pressure at a wind speed of
20m1s is 0.24 KPa and at a wind speed of 40m1s is 0.96 Kpa.
(1)

(2)
The windward wall of a building is subjected to the above positive pressure and the
leeward wall to a negative pressure (or suction) which act together and can exert on the building
as a whole a combined force some 20 % greater than the positive pressure on the windward
side.
(3)
On flat or low slope skillion roofs and on the leeward side of pitched roofs, the wind
exerts a suction which at a wind speed of2Smls can be greater than the mass of the roof itself
if the roofing is for example, of sheet metal which together with battens, rafters and ceiling has
a mass of 40Kg/m2 or less.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS5 1995

_----:..

L-l

--------'

-----'-----'-'

\-~-

UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

(4),

Maintaining the roof intact in a wind of this speed, is therefore highly dependent oni)the
adequacy with which the roofing is attached to the battens, the battens to the rafters, the rafters
to the wall plates, and the wall plates to the studs.
(5)
Projecting constructions such as eaves and open verandah roofs can be subject to
simultaneous action. to pressure underneath and suction, above and are particularly vulnerable
to wind damage unless due care is taken with the fastening of the roof elements to one another
and the attachment of the roof as a whole to the frame work of the structure.

(6)
The amount of pressure which may be exerted by wind on the interior of a building is
directly related to the size and number of openings in external walls.
(7)
Severe damage can occur from a sudden increase of internal pressure due to the collapse
of a window, door, or wall cladding during a storm,

L.3

CONSTRUCTIONAL SAFEGUARDS

L.3.1 Roofing Cladding


(1)
The adequacy of local practices for the fixing of roof cladding should be examined. In
the case of roof tiles, it could be good to practice to secure every tile. Corrugated. roof sheeting
shouid be screw-fixed rather than nailed, arid special attention might be given to reducing tite
spacing of fixing clips for strip metal roofing and to the securing of such clips to the roof

framing.
"7.!_'

(2)
Fixings at close centres are especially needed around the perimeter or roofs not protected
by parapets, and for rolled or turned edges.
(3)

Closely spaced fixings are' essential foroverhangs beyond the line of external walls.

~.3.2 Roof Framing

"

, ,I

(1)
Roof framing as described in Chapter VII or'this Code Standard is the product of craft
practices that have proved adequate'in general service. The ultimatestrength of such leaming
is some what unknown, being determined largely by-the efficacy of skew-nailed connections
'made between members. On this account, various forms of supplementary fixings are employed
where experience or the prevalence of severe storms suggests the need for greater assured
strength.
Ii
_ "
l>

'.

Precautionary measures include the double-nailing of connections.and the use of fixing


d~vices such as galvanized steel wire or flat straps, spike connectors or pressed-steel anchor
'plates at alternate joints or crossings of members.
(2)

1..-1

EBC$ IS 1996

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

"
APPENDIX I.
L.~.3

Tying to Walls

(I)
The manner of securing roof framing to external walls is dictated by the materials from. .
which the walls are constructed.

(2)

Speclal attachments to supplement nailing are best located over external walls beside .
each rafter, and .devised to hook over a purlin or batten fixed above the rafter at that point.

L.3.4 Securini the Structure


(1)

The structure should be securely anchored or tied from foundation to roof with adequate
bolts, straps, ties or other means of anchorage. To prevent racking in timber framed structures,
particular attention should be paid to bracing.

L.3.S ~8mng
(1)

. Galvanized flat-head or spring head nails mustbe used to secure metal straps and fixing

brackets to timber. 'Experience has shown that corrosion around ~l holes can result in fixings
pulling clear of small-headed nails. As high humidity tends to be a characteristic of severe
wind-storm regions, it is desirable to inhibit corrosion at fixings by the applications of
bituminous or other anti corrosive paint to vital metallic components.

L.3.6 MAINTENANCE
Structural timber and timber into whichfixings ar~ made should be regularly inspected,
to confirm that they are sound and that rust has not weakened the holding power of nails,
screws, straps or bolts. Attention should also be given to fascia boards and the linings to eaves

(1)

soffi~.

ETHIOPIAN lIUILDING CODE STANDARD

EBCS- 5

1995':L.3

OlitlONtfJ.S 300~ DNI07JnS NtfltlOIHJ.3

9661 9 - S~S3

t-'I

[XNV'IU U3'I A'I'IVNOI.LN3iNI 3:DVd SIRL]

It

I13tlWU. :/ONOU.

rzhu.n

_ _ _ 0.

-----~ -

APPENDIX

--- - - ----~

TIMBER SPECIES

(I)
Although the timber of all the species listed in this Appendix is considered suitable for
scaffold planks, approval to use any species shouldbe obtained from the concerned body before
it is used.
The local names or standard trade names used in this Appendix are in accordance with
information gathered from wood utilization and Research Centre (Bult.I-198S)

(2)

N~:

(1)

S must be seasoned to a moisture contentnot exceeding 15 %.


~}' reqUires sapwood treatment against ryctus attack

Susceptibility not known, must therefore be treated

Can be used in unseasoned condition.

(2)

S3

Provisional rating
Table Ml Soft Wood Spedes

Standard trade
(Local names)

Strength group

Moisture Content

Podocarpus (Zigba)
~ines Radiata (Radiata)
pinwa Patula (Patula)
Juniprus Procera(Thid)
Cupresses-Lustanica (Nech-Thid)
Douglas-fir

S5
56
S6
S4
S7
S5

S
S
S

Lyctus
Susceptibility

..

S
S
S

For scaffolding, Nech-Tid is acceptable even thoqht grouped as S7, but only if it is
selected free of all defects.

Note: This list is not exhausti"e and any species may be used with the prior approval of tile
concemed body.

ETHIO/IIAN BUILD/Nfl, CODE STANDARD

scs.,..M-l
I

~~---_.- ...
_.~--,---"-_._".,,,

~,."

- - - ---

.....

,----_.

If.t

C/TlUZA TlON OF TIMBER

Table M2 Hardwood Species


Standard trade

Strength group

(Local name)

Oak (Werka)
Olea'(Weiril) i,
Iroko (Dego)
Mahogany
(Nech Beha.i'z3f),'lt

"F

S6
SS
S3
S3
S4
S2
S4

:
'

Moisture content

..

(Tikur-inchet)
Warburgia (Kenefa)
Fagaropsis (Dero)
. Albizia Spcs.(sissa)
Morous -musyzagia(Gangi)
Ocotea (Soecho)
Cordia Africana (Wanza)
Hagenia (Kosso)
Aningeria Spes.(Keraro)

84
S3

y
y
y

S
S

y
y
y

5
. 5

SS
5S

S/us
S/us
S/us
S/us

S4
S6

S
'S

5S
,.

Lyctus
susceptibility

'f

S
S
S
S

Y
y
y
y

'

Note This list is not exhaustive and any species may be used with the prior approval of the
concerned body.
f....

~,.

.; .

M..2ESCS5 ,. .

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen